Skip to main content

Full text of "More about Jesus"

See other formats


LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS.  J 

k-s — I 


# _       # 

J  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA.  | 


MATTHEW-  XIX*  VER  -XIV  gg 


MOEE  ABOUT  JESUS. 


ILLUSTRATIONS  AND  A  MAP. 


BY  THE   ATTTHOR   OF 


"PEEP  OF  DAY,"  "READING  WITHOUT  TEARS/'  &c„  &c. 


NEW    YORK: 

HARPER    &    BROTHERS,    PUBLISHERS, 

FRANKLIN    SQUAEE. 


\X^tf£tr2^Z%?~2-*-    £-£^  ^^ 


~e.  -?^l  S-^S-e? 


p^w 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  one  thousand 
eight  hundred  and  fifty-nine,  by 

Harper  &  Brothers, 

In  the  Clerk's  Ofiice  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Southern  District 
of  New  York.  - 


PREFACE. 


"Tell  me  more  about  Jesus!"  is  a  request  some- 
times made  in  eager  accents  by  the  rosy  lips  of  four 
years  to  a  fond  parent  who  has  lately  taught  the  babe 
to  lisp  the  name  of  Jesus. 

"Tell  me  more  about  Jesus!"  is  a  request  some- 
times made  in  faltering  accents  by  the  parched  lips  of 
fourscore  to  a  kind  daughter  bending  over  the  dying 
pillow. 

During  the  long  interval  separating  infancy  from 
old  age,  a  cold  indifference  too  often  steals  over  the 
heart  which  seemed  for  a  little  while  to  glow  with  the 
love  of  Jesus.  The  pleasures  and  prospects,  the  poets 
and  princes,  the  stories  and  studies,  the  hopes  and  the 
heroes,  the  charms  and  the  changes  of  this  vain  world, 
captivate  the  imagination  and  engross  the  affections ; 
while  He  who  occupies  the  highest  throne  in  heaven 
is  degraded  to  the  lowest  in  that  heart  which  He  died 
to  redeem.     So  generally  diffused  is  this  indifference, 


VI  PREFACE. 

that  a  Christian  nation,  in  the  examination  of  candi- 
dates for  some  of  her  most  honorable  offices,  allows  a 
knowledge  of  the  words  of  Shakspeare,  Horace,  or 
Homer  to  avail  much,  and  a  knowledge  of  the  words 
of  Jesus — nothing  !  Yet  that  knowledge,  without 
any  other,  renders  a  man  fitter  to  rule  than  all  other 
knowledge  without  it. 

There  is  an  examination  coming  in  which  that  de- 
spised knowledge  will  be  the  only  knowledge  that 
will  avail  any  thing.  "  For  this  is  eternal  life,  to 
know  Thee,  the  only  true  God,  and  Jesus  Christ  whom 
Thou  hast  sent." 

Oh,  parents,  let  no  prospect  of  worldly  advantages 
hinder  you  from  making  it  your  chief  object  to  im- 
part the  knowledge  of  Jesus  to  your  children !  Wheth- 
er they  say,  "  Tell  me  more  about  Jesus,"  or  whether 
they  do  not  say  it,  continue,  oh !  continue  to  tell  them 
about  Jesus. 

Gather  them  around  you  on  the  Sunday  afternoon 
or  evening,  and  induce  them,  by  various  means,  to 
search  the  Word  of  God. 

This  little  work  is  humbly  offered  as  a  feeble  help 
in  those  exercises.  Children  are  apt  to  read  words 
without  reflecting  on  their  meaning.  The  simple  de- 
scriptions in  these  pages  may  attract  some  volatile 
minds,  and  the  questions  may  recall  to  their  memories 


PREFACE.  Vll 

the  interesting  sayings  that  have  been  purposely  omit- 
ted in  the  descriptions. 

When  memory  fails  to  supply  the  omissions,  then 
recourse  will  be  had  to  the  Scriptures,  and  the  forgot- 
ten sayings  will  be  more  deeply  impressed  upon  the 
mind. 

It  is  not  to  be  expected  that  children  under  eight 
years  of  age  should  join  in  this  exercise,  but  it  is  hoped 
that  some  young  persons  double  that  age  may  not  de- 
spise it.*  Great  pains  have  been  taken,  by  consulting 
Kitto's  Dictionary  of  the  Bible,  Home's  Introduction, 
Scott's  Commentary,  Josephus's  History,  and  Stanley's 

*  Note  to  Parents. — As  a  successor  to  this  work,  and  for  the  use 
of  more  advanced  youth,  and  for  grown  persons,  the  Publishers  rec- 
ommend Eev.  Dr.  W.  M.  Thomson's  recently  published  volumes, 
"The  Land  and  the  Book."  Sabbath-school  teachers,  clergymen, 
and  all  engaged  in  the  instruction  of  youth  in  the  truths  of  Holy 
Writ,  will  find  no  other  book  so  serviceable  or  so  interesting.  Dr. 
Thomson  resided  for  twenty-five  years  in  Syria,  and  enjoyed  there 
unusual  facilities  for  correct  observation  of  the  peculiarities  of  country 
and  people.  His  work  embodies  the  result  of  this  quarter  of  a  cen- 
tury of  observation.  It  is  arranged  with  a  complete  Index  of  Scrip- 
ture passages,  upon  which  light  is  thrown  by  circumstances  and  inci- 
dents detailed  in  the  work ;  contains  over  two  hundred  and  forty  beau- 
tiful engravings,  illustrations  of  the  people,  customs,  and  scenery  of 
the  Holy  Land ;  and,  as  a  thorough,  practical,  and  vividly-interest- 
ing commentary  on  the  manners  and  customs,  places  and  people  of 
the  New  and  Old  Testament,  it  is  invaluable  to  all  Bible  students. 


Vlll  PREFACE. 

Travels,  to  supply  information  respecting  places  and 
customs. 

No  applications  are  made  of  the  affecting  facts  de- 
scribed, because  such,  applications  appear  dull  to  giddy 
childhood,  unless  exactly  appropriate  to  individual 
state,  and  urged  in  the  moving  tones  of  a  parent's 
voice.  The  writer  keeps  silence  that  the  parent  may 
speak. 

Sunday-school  teachers  may  occasionally  read  this 
book  to  their  first  class,  and  thus  lead  their  scholars  to 
reflect  on  passages  that  they  can  already  repeat  by  rote. 


CONTENTS. 


LESSON  PAGE 

i.  The  Aged  Priest 17 

ii.  The  Poor  Maiden 21 

in.  The  Cousin's  Visit 23 

iv.  The  Baby  Prophet 26 

v.  The  Baby  Saviour 28 

vi.  The  Babe  in  the  Temple 30 

vn.  The  Star 33 

vni.  The  Alarm 37 

ix.  The  Weeping  Mothers  40 

x.  The  Carpenter 43 

xi.  The  Joyful  Journey 45 

xii.  The  Wise  Child 46 

xiii.  The  Earnest  Preacher 49 

xiv.  The  Holy  Dove 53 

xv.  The  Dreadful  Desert 55 

xvi.  The  Lamb 57 

xvii.  The  Saviour's  Home 58 

xvni.  The  Feast < 61 

xix.  The  Market 66 

xx.  The  Secret  Visit 69 

xxi.  The  Well 71 

xxn.  The  Cruel  Congregation 77 

xxm.  The  Four  Fishermen 81 


X  CONTENTS. 

LESSON  PAGE 

xxiv.  The  Man  with  Four  Friends 86 

xxv.  The  Man  without  a  Friend 91 

xxvi.  The  Mountain  Prayer 94 

xxvn.  The  Wild  Man , 99 

xxviii.   The  Prison 104 

xxix.  The  Guilty  King 108 

xxx.  The  Supper  by  the  Lake 110 

xxxi.  The  Walk  on  the  Waters , 114 

xxxii.  The  Selfish  Multitude 118 

xxxiii.  The  Mountain  of  Glory 121 

xxxiv.  The  Miserable  Youth 124 

xxxv.  The  Collectors  of  Money 127 

xxxvi.  The  Busy  Woman 130 

xxxvii.  The  Grateful  Beggar 135 

xxxvih.  The  Ungrateful  Nine 139 

xxxix.  The  Earnest  Beggar 143 

xl.  The  Happy  Publican 146 

xli.  The  Sorrowful  Sisters 151 

xlii.  The  Grateful  Woman 155 

xliii.  The  Royal  Rider 159 

xliv.  The  Fig-tree 167 

xxv.  The  Poor  Widow 170 

xlvi.  The  Traitor 173 

xlvii.  The  Passover  prepared 175 

XLvm.  The  Passover  eaten .• 178 

xlix.  The  Garden 183 

l.  The  Priest's  Palace 187 

li.  The  Porch 191 

lii.  The  Suicide 194 

liii.  The  Governor's  Palace 197 

liv.  The  Crucifixion 206 

lv.  The  Soldier's  Spear 213 


CONTENTS.  XI 

LESSON  PAGE 

lvi.  The  Burial , 216 

lvii.  The  Guard 220 

Lvni.  The  Kesurrection 223 

lix.  The  Evening  Walk..,,,..,,, 229 

lx.  The  Unbelieving  Apostle,.. 233 

lxi.  The  Breakfast ,...,, 234 

lxii.  The  Mountain  Assembly 237 

lxiii.  The  Ascension ,.., 239 


LIST   OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 

Blessing  little  Children Frontispiece. 

Map  of  the  Land  of  Israel 16 

Jerusalem 17 

Nazareth 21 

Hebron 23 

Bethlehem 28 

The  Temple 30 

Dove  for  Offering 31 

Wise  Men  presenting  Gifts 35 

Asses  used  for  Traveling 37 

Egypt 38 

Eiver  between  Rocks 49 

Locusts,  life  size 51 

John  teaching 52 

John  baptizing  in  Jordan 53 

Christ  in  the  Wilderness •. 56 

The  Marriage  in  Cana 61 

Water-jars 63 

Jesus  driving  out  the  Money-changers 68 

The  Woman  of  Samaria 71 

An  Eastern  Well 73 

Nazareth 77 

The  Tumult  at  Nazareth 79 

The  Lake  of  Gennesaret 81 

Peter  and  James  called , 84 


XIV  LIST    OF    ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PAGE 

Capernaum 86 

House  with  flat  Roof 88 

The  Pool  of  Bethesda 91 

Jesus  preaching  on  the  Mount 97 

Gadara f! 99 

The  Lord  rebuking  the  Waters 100 

Castle  of  Macherus 104 

Jesus  preaching  near  the  Lake 110 

Jesus  walking  on  the  Waves 116 

The  Mount  of  Transfiguration 121 

The  Transfiguration 122 

Jesus  at  Bethany 130 

Present  Aspect  of  Bethany 131 

Cluster  of  Dates 134 

The  Pool  of  Siloam 135 

Present  Aspect  of  the  Pool  of  Siloam 137 

Present  Aspect  of  the  Plain  of  Jericho 141 

Jesus  near  Jericho 146 

Sycamore-tree 147 

Sycamore  Figs 150 

Jesus  on  Mount  Olivet 159 

Present  Aspect  of  the  Mount  of  Olives 161 

A  Palm-tree 163 

Gethsemane 183 

Jesus  praying  alone... 185 

Valley  of  the  Son  of  Hinnom , 194 

The  Floor  of  colored  Stones 200 

Calvary 206 

The  Garden  of  Joseph  of  Arimathea 216 

Bearing  Jesus  to  the  Tomb 218 

Within  the  Tomb 219 

The  Meeting  near  Emmaus 229 

"He  was  seen  of  above  Five  Hundred  Brethren  at  01106' ' 237 


JERUSALEM. 


MORE  ABOUT  JESUS. 


LESSON  L 

THE    AGED    PRIEST. 

Behold  that  great  city ! 

"What  is  that  beautiful  building  on  the  top  of  that 
hill  ?  It  is  white  as  snow ;  it  shines  like  the  sun  ;  for 
it  is  made  of  white  marble,  adorned  with  gold. 

Look  through  the  golden  gate.     How  beautiful  a 

B 


18  THE    AGED    PRIEST. 

room!  There  are  seven  golden  candlesticks  on  one 
side,  and  a  golden  table  on  the  other;  and  in  the 
midst  a  golden  altar. 

Before  that  altar  an  aged  man  is  standing.  He  has 
a  long  gray  beard,  and  he  is  clothed  in  white  linen, 
with  a  blue  and  scarlet  girdle  around  his  waist,  a 
white  turban  or  bonnet  on  his  head,  and  no  shoes 
upon  his  feet. 

Smoke  is  ascending  from  that  golden  altar,  and  the 
air  is  sweet  with  the  smell  of  spices. 

That  old  man  is  praying  earnestly.  Surely  he  must 
be  a  good  man ! 

But,  behold !  what  a  glorious  light  fills  the  place ! 
See !  the  old  man  trembles!    What  makes  him  afraid? 

On  one  side  of  that  golden  altar  a  bright  creature 
stands.  His  garments  are  whiter  far  than  those  the 
old  man  wears ;  his  countenance  is  brighter  far  than 
the  light  of  the  lamps  in  the  golden  candlestick. 

Hark !  he  speaks.  He  seems  to  be  uttering  words 
of  comfort.    How  much  astonished  that  old  man  looks ! 

But  the  bright  messenger  looks  displeased.  Is  he 
rebuking  the  old  man  ? 

He  is  gone ! 

The  old  man  lifts  up  the  curtain  before  the  golden 
gate,  goes  down  the  twelve  marble  steps,  and  enters  a 
court  full  of  people. 


THE    AGED    PRIEST.  19 

Those  people  seem  glad  to  see  him.  But  he  does 
not  speak  to  them ;  he  only  makes  signs. 

And  now  a  lamb  is  offered  up  on  the  great  brass 
altar  in  the  court,  and  the  singers  sing  psalms,  and 
the  trumpeters  blow  trumpets ;  but  that  old  man  hears 
not  the  sound. 

After  the  teacher  has  read  the  above  section  to  the  child,  let 
her  ask  the  questions  below.  The  method  of  teaching  must  de- 
pend upon  the  age  and  tmderstanding  of  the  pupils.  If  they 
be  more  than  ten  years  old,  they  might  like  to  search  themselves 
in  the  Scriptures  for  the  answers,  after  being  told  where  to  look. 
If  the  pupils  be  ve?*y  young,  it  might  be  better  to  tell  them  the 
answers.  In  no  case  should  the  Scripture  lesson  be  made  a 
task,  but  should  always  be  taught  so  as  to  make  it  a  pleasure 
and  a  treat. 

What  is  the  name  of  that  beautiful  building? 

In  what  city  is  it  built? 

What  is  the  name  of  that  old  man? 

What  is  he  doing  ?  Answer.  Burning  incense  on  the  golden  al- 
tar in  the  Holy  Place.  The  priests  drew  lots  each  day  to  know 
which  of  them  should  have  this  honor. 

What  is  incense  ?  Sweet-smelling  spices  burned  and  offered  up. 
See  Exod.  xxx. 

Is  the  old  man  who  offers  the  incense  the  high-priest?  No,  he 
is  a  common  priest.  He  may  go  into  the  Holy  Place,  but  not  into 
the  Holy  of  Holies. 

What  is  the  angel's  name  ? 

What  message  does  he  bring? 

Why  is  he  displeased? 

What  punishment  does  he  inflict  from  God  on  the  aged  man  ? 

How  long  did  the  old  priest  stay  in  Jerusalem  before  he  returned 


20  THE    AGED    PRIEST. 

home  ?  He  staid  till  the  end  of  the  week.  The  priests  were  di- 
vided into  twenty-four  courses  (or  sets),  and  each  course  served  a 
week  at  a  time. 

Luke,  i.,  5-23. 

This  passage  may  either  be  read  or  used  as  a  reference  only. 

A  verse  of  Scripture  to  be  learned  by  heart : 
THE    ANGELAS    WORDS  TO    ZACHARIAS. 

UI  am  Gabriel,  that  stand  in  the  presence 
of  God,  and  am  sent  to  speak  unto  thee,  and 
to  show  thee  these  glad  tidings." — Luke,  i.,  19. 


PRESENT  ASPECT  OP  NAZAEETH. 


LESSON  II. 

THE    POOR    MAIDEN. 

A  small  town  is  built  on  the  side  of  a  fruitful  hill. 
The  streets  of  that  town  are  steep  and  narrow.  The 
houses  are  built  of  rough  stones,  and  their  roofs  are 
flat.  All  around  are  corn-fields  and  green  pastures, 
adorned  with  blue  and  scarlet  flowers,  and  vines  laden 
with  purple  grapes,  and  olive-trees,  and  fig-trees. 


22  THE    POOR    MAIDEN. 

In  a  lowly  dwelling  in  that  small  town  a  poor 
maiden  lives.     She  is  a  gentle,  modest5  holy  girl. 

Behold!  an  angel  is  speaking  to  her.  That  bright 
angel  is  full  of  joy ;  that  poor  maiden  is  full  of  fear. 
The  angel  is  telling  her  some  delightful  news.  Why, 
then,  is  she  so  full  of  fear?  She  seems  to  wonder 
that  an  angel  should  bring  such  a  message  to  a  hum- 
ble maiden  like  herself.  She  seems  to  think  herself 
unworthy  of  the  notice  of  the  Most  High. 

Now  the  angel  is  gone,  and  she  is  thinking  of  the 
wonderful  things  he  has  said. 

What  is  the  name  of  that  town  ? 

What  is  the  name  of  that  angel? 

What  is  the  name  of  that  maiden? 

What  delightful  message  does  the  angel  bring? 

How  long  is  it  since  that  angel  spoke  to  Zacharias  ?    Six  months. 

Luke,  i.,  26-29. 
THE    ANGEL'S    WORDS    TO    MARY. 

"  Fear  not,  Mary,  for  thou  hast  found  favor 
with  God." 


LESSON  III. 

THE    COUSIN'S   VISIT. 

Those  hills  are  not  so  green  and  flowery  as  the 
hills  near  Nazareth.  They  are  more  stony  and  more 
craggy,  yet  they  are  fruitful  in  corn  and  wine. 

Among  those  hills  there  dwells  an  aged  man,  with 
his  aged  wife.  No  little  children  are  playing  at  their 
feet,  and  calling  them  "  grandfather"  and  "  grand- 
mother." Yet  they  look  peaceful  and  happy.  But 
they  do  not  speak  to  one  another.     How  is  that  ?  for 


24  the  cousin's  visit. 

they  seem  to  love  one  another.  Sometimes  the  old 
man  makes  signs  or  writes,  but  he  never  speaks  to 
the  old  woman  or  to  any  of  his  friends. 

Have  you  ever  seen  that  old  man  before?  Per- 
haps you  remember  him  in  the  Holy  Place.  He  is 
not  dressed  as  he  was  then.  He  wears  no  white  robe 
nor  white  bonnet,  but  he  has  clothes  like  the  other 
people  in  the  town — a  long,  close-fitting  garment,  and 
over  it  a  large  loose  shawl  twisted  around  his  limbs. 

Who  is  stopping  at  the  door  of  the  old  man's  dwell- 
ing? A  sweet  and  modest  maiden.  She  has  come 
from  a  long  way  off.  How  weary  she  must  be !  She 
opens  her  arms  to  embrace  that  aged  woman.  What 
an  affectionate  meeting ! 

The  old  woman  treats  that  maiden  as  if  she  were 
an  angel  come  from  Heaven ;  she  seems  to  think  it  a 
great  honor  to  have  her  in  the  house. 

That  aged  saint  is  speaking  sweet  words  of  blessing. 
The  maiden  answers  in  a  lovely  hymn,  sweet  as  an 
angel's  song. 

When  she  has  finished  her  hymn,  she  does  not  leave 
the  house  to  return  home.  That  good  old  man  wishes 
her  to  stay  in  his  house,  and  so  she  stays  for  a  great 
many  weeks.  But  while  the  two  friends  talk  togeth- 
er, the  old  man  sits  silent ;  he  can  not  hear  their  good 
words  nor  their  sweet  hymns. 


the   cousin's  visit.  25 

What  town  is  that?  No  one  knows  the  name,  hut  it  is  one  of 
the  priests'  cities  in  Judah ;  and  it  is  probable  the  town  is  Hebron, 
near  the  place  where  Abraham  once  dwelt,  and  where  Isaac  was 
born.  There  were  thirteen  cities  where  priests  had  houses,  and 
gardens,  and  fields. 

Who  is  that  old  man? 

Why  does  he  not  wear  his  priestly  dress?  Because  that  was 
only  worn  in  the  temple. 

Why  does  he  not  speak  ? 

Who  is  that  old  woman? 

Who  is  that  poor  maiden? 

Whence  does  she  come  ? 

How  far  has  she  traveled?     About  a  hundred  miles. 

Is  that  old  woman  a  friend  of  hers  ?     Yes,  she  is  her  cousin. 

Why  does  the  maiden  come  and  see  her  now  ?  Because  the  an- 
gel told  her  of  the  son  promised  to  that  old  woman. 

Why  does  the  old  woman  pay  so  much  respect  to  the  young 
maiden?  Because  she  knows  that  the  Son  of  God  will  be  that 
maiden's  son. 

What  hymn  did  the  maiden  utter?  That  hymn  which  begins, 
"My  soul  doth  magnify  the  Lord." 

How. long  did  the  maiden  stay  in  the  old  priest's  house? 

Luke,  i.,  39-57. 

Elizabeth's  words  to  mary. 
"  Blessed    art    thou    among    women.  .  .  . 
Whence  is  this  to  me,  that  the  mother  of  my 
Lord  should  come  to  me?" — Luke,  i.,  42,  43. 


26  THE    BABY    PROPHET. 


LESSON  IV. 

THE    BABY    PROPHET. 

How  happy  are  the  people  assembled  in  that  house ! 
It  is  the  house  among  the  hills  where  the  old  priest 
lives.  There  he  is,  and  his  old  wife,  wifli  a  great 
many  friends  and  neighbors.  But  where  is  that  dear 
maiden  who  came  to  see  them  from  a  great  way  off? 
She  has  gone  home ;  she  is  not  there. 

What  is  it,  that  little  thing  wrapped  up  so  careful- 
ly, looked  at  by  every  body?  It  is  a  very  little 
baby.  It  can  not  sit  up ;  it  can  not  laugh ;  it  can  not 
hold  any  thing  in  its  hands.  It  is  a  baby  of  a  week 
old. 

How  fondly  that  old  woman  folds  it  in  her  arms! 
How  fondly  that  old  priest  fixes  his  eyes  upon  it! 
Are  they  the  parents  of  the  babe  ? 

The  friends  in  the  house  are  talking  together,  and 
often  looking  toward  the  babe,  as  if  they  were  speak- 
ing of  it.  But  the  old  woman  does  not  like  what 
they  say,  for  she  seems  to  say  "  No." 

Then  the  friends  look  surprised,  and  turn  toward 
the  old  priest.     They  do  not  speak  to  him,  but  make 


THE    BABY    PROPHET.  27 

signs,  as  if  he  were  deaf.  He  makes  a  sign,  and  a 
little  board  is  brought  to  him.  It  is  about  the  size  of 
a  slate,  only  it  is  a  piece  of  wood,  spread  over  with 
wax.  The  priest  takes  an  iron  pencil,  and  writes  on 
the  wax  just  two  or  three  words. 

The  friends  read  the  words,  and  seem  astonished; 
but  the  old  woman  is  not 

What  a  sudden  change  there  is  in  that  holy  priest ! 
He  is  speaking  now.  Surely  he  is  praising  God  in 
the  words  of  poetry !  At  last  he  turns  to  the  babe, 
and  speaks  to  it,  with  joy  shining  in  his  face. 

Who  is  that  priest,  and  who  is  his  wife? 

Who  is  that  babe? 

What  are  the  friends  come  together  for  ? 

What  are  they  talking  about  ? 

Why  does  the  mother  say  No?  Surely  her  husband  must  have 
told  her  in  writing  what  the  angel  said  ? 

What  words  does  the  father  write  upon  the  board  or  table  ? 

Why  does  he  begin  to  speak? 

Why  did  the  priest  rejoice  so  much  over  that  babe?  Because 
he  was  come  into  the  world  to  tell  men  about  Jesus. 

Luke,  i.,  57,  to  end. 
THE   WORDS    OF   ZACHARIAS    TO    HIS    BABE. 

"And    thou,    child,    shalt    be    called    the 
Prophet  of  the  Highest." — Luke,  i.,  76. 


13ETIILEHEM. 


LESSON  V. 

THE    BABY    SAVIOUR. 

It  is  night.  In  that  town,  among  those  stony  hills, 
many  travelers  are  sleeping  in  their  beds ;  for  there  is 
an  inn,  with  a  large  court,  and  many  little  rooms  built 
round  the  court,  and  those  little  rooms  are  filled  this 
night  with  weary  travelers.  The  asses  on  which  they 
rode  are  in  the  little  sheds  behind. 

In  one  of  those  sheds,  among  the  asses,  a  babe  is 
sleeping.  It  is  wrapped  up  in  long  clothes,  and  it  is 
lying  upon  a  bed  of  hay.     A  poor  maiden  is  close  be- 


THE    BABY    SAVIOUK.  29 

side  the  babe,  looking  upon  it  with  the  fondest  love ; 
while  a  good  man  is  standing  near,  watching  over  the 
babe  and  its  mother. 

Suddenly  the  door  opens.  Several  poor  men  want 
to  come  in.  They  seem  to  be  out  of  breath  from  run- 
ning fast.  "When  they  see  the  babe  they  are  delight- 
ed. They  are  telling  of  something  they  have^seen  in 
the  sky. 

The  maiden  listens  to  all  they  say.  She  does  not 
speak  much  herself,  but  she  attends  to  all  good  words, 
and  thinks  about  them,  and  remembers  them  a  long- 
time. She  is  a  tender-hearted,  heavenly -minded 
maiden. 

The  poor  men  leave  the  stable;  praising  God  as  they 
go,  and  telling  every  body  they  meet  about  the  babe 
in  the  stable. 

What  is  the  name  of  that  town  ? 

Who  is  the  man  watching  over  the  babe  and  its  mother  ? 

Who  came  to  the  stable  in  the  night? 

Who  told  them  to  come? 

What  are  they  praising  God  for? 

Luke,  ii.,  1-20. 
THE    ANGEL'S    WORDS    TO    THE    SHEPHERDS. 

"Fear  not:  for,  behold,  I  bring  you  good 
tidings  of  great  joy,  which  shall  be  to  all  peo- 
ple."—Luke,  ii.,  10. 


THE  TEMPLE. 


LESSON  VL 


THE    BABE    IN    THE    TEMPLE. 

A  holy  maiden  is  going  up  some  steps,  and  pass- 
ing through  a  golden  gate  into  a  court  surrounded  by 
a  stone  wall.  There  are  more  steps  leading  into  a 
higher  court,  but  she  may  go  no  farther. 

Is  the  maiden  all  alone  ?  No ;  a  good  man  is  tak- 
ing care  of  her ;  for  she  is  poor,  and  weak,  and  timid, 
and  needs  his  care.  They  bring  with  them  a  little 
babe,  wrapped  in  long  clothes.     It  is  the  loveliest 


THE    BABE    IN    THE    TEMPLE. 


31 


babe  that  ever  was  seen.  There  may  have  been  other 
babes  as  fair,  but  there  never  was  one  with  so  sweet  a 
countenance.  No  passion  ever  reddened  that  little 
face ;  patience  and  meekness  may  be  seen,  like  two 
doves,  in  those  gentle  eyes. 

And  what  are  those  birds  that  his  mother  carries  in 
a  basket?  They  are  two  doves — two  doves,  just  like 
her  own  gentle  babe. 


DOVE  FOE   OFFERING. 


She  gives  these  doves  to  a  man  in  a  white  robe. 
She  gives  them  to  him  to  offer  to  the  Lord,  because 
the  Lord  has  given  her  a  son.  If  she  were  rich,  she 
would  offer  a  lamb,  but  as  she  is  poor  she  brings 
doves  instead.  She  gives  into  the  priest's  hand  an- 
other offering :  it  is  five  small  pieces  of  money.  They 
are  the  offering  for  a  first-born  son,  for  all  the  first- 


32  THE    BABE    IN    THE    TEMPLE. 

born  sons  were  the  Lord's,  and  must  be  bought  back 
with  money. 

Now  there  comes  into  the  court  a  very  old  man, 
with  a  joyful  face.  He  goes  up  to  the  mother,  and 
takes  the  babe  in  his  arms,  and  begins  to  pray  to  his 
God.  Soon  he  turns  to  the  mother  of  the  babe,  and 
to  her  husband,  and  speaks  to  them  both  in  a  sorrow- 
ful manner. 

But  who  is  this  coming  in,  bent  with  age  ?  It  is  a 
very  old  woman ;  she  seems  to  be  more  than  a  hund- 
red years  old.  She  is  praising  God  most  earnestly. 
She  speaks  to  the  people  standing  around  her  in  the 
court. 


Who  is  the  babe? 

And  who  is  his  mother?     And  who  is  her  husband? 

How  old  is  that  babe?     Forty  days,  or  nearly  six  weeks. 

What  is  he  brought  to  the  temple  for?  To  be  presented  to  the 
Lord,  because  he  is  the  first-born  son. 

Why  does  the  mother  give  money  to  the  priest?  To  redeem  or 
buy  back  her  son.  A  lamb  might  have  been  offered  upon  the  al- 
tar, but  a  child  could  not ;  so  he  was  bought  back  with  money. 
See  Num.,  xviii.,  16,  17. 

How  much  money  was  paid  to  redeem  a  first-born  son?  Five 
shekels.     Each  shekel  was  worth  two  shillings  and  threepence. 

Why  does  the  mother  present  the  doves  to  the  priest  ?  As  her 
own  offering  to  God  for  letting  her  come  again  into  the  temple 
after  her  son  has  been  born. 

Where  will  the  priest  take  the  doves  ?  To  the  great  brass  altar 
before  the  gate  of  the  temple. 

Who  is  that  old  man? 


THE    STAR.  38 

What  does  he  pray  to  God  for?  To  let  him  die,  now  he  has 
seen  the  Saviour. 

How  did  he  know  that  the  babe  was  the  Saviour  of  the  world  ? 
The  Holy  Ghost  told  him. 

Who  is  that  old  woman? 

How  old  is  she?  She  must  be  more  than  a  hundred,  for  she 
has  been  a  widow  eighty-four  years,  and  was  a  wife  seven  years. 

Luke,  ii.,  22-38. 
THE   FIRST   WORDS    OF   SIMEON^    PRAYER. 

"Lord,  now  lettest  thou  thy  servant  depart 
in  peace,  for  mine  eyes  have  seen  thy  salva- 
tion." 


LESSON  VII. 

THE    STAR. 

Who  are  those  men  in  rich  and  handsome  gar- 
ments, going  about  the  streets  of  a  great  city  ? 

They  seem  to  be  strangers,  who  have  come  from 
far.  They  are  asking  questions  of  the  people  they 
meet.  Every  one  seems  surprised  at  what  they  say, 
and  many  seem  troubled  and  terrified,  yet  no  one  can 
give  an  answer  to  the  strangers. 

But  see !  the  strangers  are  standing  at  the  gate  of  a 
fine  palace.     The  servants  lead  them  into  a  room  of 

C 


34:  THE    STAR. 

enormous  size,  adorned  with,  gold,  and  fitted  up  with 
large  marble  seats. 

An  old  man,  in  a  magnificent  purple  robe,  receives 
them ;  he  speaks  to  them  graciously,  yet  his  counte- 
nance is  fierce  and  cruel.  But  the  strangers  appear 
pleased  with  what  that  old  man  says,  and  they  go 
away  in  good  spirits. 

They  mount  their  camels  by  night,  and  leave  the 
city  quietly,  for  so  that  old  man  wished  they  should. 

Their  way  lies  among  the  chalky  hills  where  shep- 
herds feed  their  flocks.  Did  those  shepherds  see  them 
pass  who  lately  heard  the  angels  sing  at  midnight  ? 

When  the  strangers  have  gone  six  miles  they  reach 
a  hill,  covered  with  vines,  and  watered  by  running 
streams.  They  enter  a  small  town  built  on  that  hill, 
but  they  know  not  where  to  go,  till,  looking  up,  they 
see  a  bright  star. 

It  is  a  long  while  since  they  saw  that  star,  but  they 
remember  it  well,  for  it  is  not  like  other  stars.  It 
moves  along  the  sky.  It  shows  the  way,  even  as  a 
bird  might  do,  flying  in  the  air.  How  full  of  joy 
those  strangers  are  at  the  sight  of  that  beautiful  trav- 
eling star !  They  watch  it  as  it  moves  over  the  roofs 
of  the  houses.  Lo !  it  stops !  it  stops  over  that  lowly 
roof. 

How  quietly  the  strangers  enter  that  house !    There 


THE    STAR.  35 

they  find  a  gentle  mother  holding  a  sweet  babe  in  her 
arms. 

They  bend  down  on  that  floor;  they  worship  that 
child.  They  rejoice  to  see  that  babe,  as  once  the 
shepherds  did. 

But  they  are  richer  than  those  shepherds. 

They  take  the  burdens  from  their  camels'  backs, 
and  open  their  treasures  at  the  baby's  feet. 


THE  WISE  MEN   PRESENTING   GIFTS. 


Here  are  costly  boxes  of  precious  gums,  which 
flowed  from  the  trees  in  their  own  land. 

Here  are  bags  of  gold,  found  near  rivers  in  their 
own  land. 

Those  precious  gums  will  make  sweet  ointment  to 


36  THE    STAR. 

anoint  the  holy  babe.  That  precious  gold  will  pur- 
chase food  for  the  poor  babe  in  the  long  journey  it  is 
going  soon  to  take. 

The  babe's  mother  was  so  poor  that  she  could  not 
afford  to  buy  a  lamb  for  her  sacrifice  when  she  went 
to  the  temple.  Grod  feedeth  the  fowls  who  know  Him 
not,  much  more  does  He  feed  His  own  children  who 
trust  in  Him. 

Who  are  the  strangers  in  that  holy  city? 

What  questions  are  they  asking  ? 

Did  they  get  an  answer  to  that  question?  Not  at  first,  but  at 
last  they  did. 

Who  sent  for  them  secretly? 

How  did  he  know  where  Christ  would  be  born?  The  priests 
and  learned  men  had  told  him;  and  they  had  found  it  from  the 
text  in  Micah,  v.,  2. 

What  question  did  the  king  ask  the  strangers  ?  When  they  had 
first  seen  the  star.  He  wanted  to  know  when  Christ  had  been 
born,  for  he  thought  the  star  must  have  appeared  first  on  the  day 
Christ  was  born.  The  strangers  told  the  king  when  Christ  was 
born,  and  he  told  them  where  he  was  born. 

How  did  they  find  the  house  where  the  babe  was?  The  star 
showed  them. 

What  sweet  gums  did  they  offer  to  the  babe? 

Why  did  they  worship  him?     Because  he  was  God. 

Matt.,  ii.,  1-12. 
THE   WISE    MEN'S    JOY. 

"When   they  saw  the  star,  they  rejoiced 
with  exceeding  great  joy."- — Matt,  ii.,  10. 


ASSES  USED   FOR  TRAVELING. 


LESSON  VIII. 


THE    ALARM. 


It  is  night.  All  is  quiet  in  the  town  among  the 
stony  hills,  six  miles  from  the  great  city. 

But  suddenly  a  man  rises  from  his  bed  in  great 
haste,  goes  out  of  the  house  into  the  stable,  and  takes 


38 


THE    ALARM. 


out  the  ass.  A  young  woman,  with,  a  child  in  her 
arms,  comes  quietly  out  of  the  same  house,  and  gets 
upon  the  ass.  Her  head  is  covered  over  with  a  loose 
garment,  and  she  fondly  wraps  it  round  her  babe,  to 
hide  it  from  every  eye. 

The  parents  are  grieved  to  leave  the  town  where 
the  baby  was  born,  and  where  shepherds  and  strangers 
came  to  worship  him.  Besides,  it  is  the  town  where 
David  lived  a  thousand  years  before. 

They  travel  day  after  day  toward  a  hotter  land. 
They  pass  through  a  great  sandy  desert,  where  there 


THE  ALARM.  39 

is  only  a  little  short  grass  and  a  few  stunted  shrubs, 
and  where  all  is  dry  and  dreary,  except  a  palm-tree 
here  and  there.  Sometimes  they  rest  under  the  shad- 
ow of  a  rock,  and  drink  of  the  waters  of  a  well.  But 
there  are  no  cooling  streams  nor  shady  groves  in  that 
desert  land. 

At  last  they  come  to  a  fruitful  land.  A  very  broad 
river  runs  through  it,  and  plenty  of  corn  grows  in  it, 
but  there  are  no  green  hills  like  the  hills  of  Canaan. 

But  what  are  those  frightful  images  of  beasts,  and 
insects,  and  all  kinds  of  things?  They  are  horrid 
idols.  Men  and  women  are  dancing  round  them  with 
wild  delight.  How  sad  it  makes  that  holy  little  fam- 
ily to  see  such  wicked  doings !  They  think  of  the 
true  God,  and  of  His  temple  at  Jerusalem. 

Why  does  that  man  rise  in  the  night  and  set  out  on  a  journey  ? 
What  is  the  man's  name? 
What  town  does  he  leave? 
To  what  land  does  he  go? 

Matt.,  iL,  12-15. 
THE    ANGELAS    WORDS    TO    JOSEPH. 

"  Arise,  take  the  young  child  and  his  moth- 
er and  flee  into  Egypt." — Matt.,  ii.,  13. 


40  THE    WEEPING   MOTHERS. 


LESSON  IX. 

THE    WEEPING   MOTHERS. 

Is  that  the  town  where  the  babe  was  born  about 
whom  angels  sang  ? 

Is  that  the  town  where  angels  told  the  shepherds  to 
go? 

Is  that  the  town  where  the  star  led  the  wise  men  ? 

Yes,  it  is  that  very  town.  It  stands  upon  the  hill 
covered  with  vines. 

The  stones  of  that  town  are  stained  with  blood — with 
the  innocent  blood  of  babes. 

Soldiers  with  drawn  swords  are  running  from  house 
to  house,  and  mothers,  clasping  babies  in  their  arms, 
are  screaming  in  the  streets. 

Behold  that  soldier  snatching  a  babe  from  its  moth- 
er's arms,  and  stabbing  it  with  his  sword !  How  the 
mother  tears  her  hair,  and  wrings  her  hands  with  ag- 
ony! Behold  there!  a  mother  lies  fainting  on  the 
ground,  with  her  bleeding  infant  by  her  side.  Be- 
hold there !  a  mother  lies  weeping  over  the  body  of 
her  babe. 

It  is  no  use  trying  to  comfort  these  poor  mothers. 


THE    WEEPING-    MOTHEES.  41 

They  say,  "  Our  little  ones  are  gone,  that  we  fondled 
in  our  arms — our  pretty  babes,  that  we  loved  so  ten- 
derly." 

Oh,  mothers,  weep  no  more!  you  shall  find  your 
little  ones  again  in  your  Saviour's  arms ;  for  a  Saviour 
is  come  (though  you  know  it  not)  to  die  for  you  and 
your  little  ones. 

When  the  soldiers  have  killed  all  the  babies  in  that 
town,  they  go  to  other  towns  close  by,  and  murder 
the  babies  there.  Every  where  there  are  mothers 
weeping  for  their  babes.  How  can  the  soldiers  bear 
the  sight ! 

To  what  town  did  the  soldiers  go  first  to  kill  the  babies  ? 

"Who  sent  them? 

Why? 

What  became  of  this  wicked  king?  Very  soon  after  he  had 
killed  the  babies  he  fell  dangerously  ill.  His  disease  was  a  very 
dreadful  one.  He  felt  as  if  a  fire  was  burning  in  the  midst  of  his 
body.  It  seemed,  indeed,  as  if  the  pains  of  hell  had  taken  hold 
upon  him  before  he  died.  His  hunger  was  as  keen  as  that  of  a 
wolf,  and  nothing  would  content  him  but  meat.  Yet  the  more  he 
ate,  the  more  pain  he  suffered.  A  loathsome  running  matter  came 
out  of  his  feet,  and  part  of  his  body  was  eaten  with  worms.  His 
breath  also  failed  him,  and  even  when  he  sat  upright  he  panted  and 
gasped  as  if  ready  to  expire.  And  so  corrupt  was  his  breath  and 
his  body,  that  it  was  most  unpleasant  to  come  near  him. 

He  sent  for  doctors,  and  declared  he  was  ready  to  do  any  thing 
they  advised.  They  told  him  to  go  to  a  place  the  other  side  of  the 
river  Jordan,  where  there  was  a  hot  spring  of  water,  and  to  bathe 
in  that  stream.  So  he  left  Jerusalem,  and  went  to  the  hot  baths ; 
but  be  was  not  at  all  the  better  for  bathing.     Then  the  doctors  de- 


42  THE    WEEPING    MOTHERS. 

sired  him  to  bathe  in  a  tub  of  oil.  So  he  did ;  but  no  sooner  was 
he  plunged  in  the  oil  than  he  seemed  to  be  dying.  His  servants 
pulled  him  out  of  the  tub,  and  began  to  cry  out  and  howl,  as  was 
the  custom  when  a  king  died.  These  loud  cries  brought  Herod  to 
himself  again. 

As  he  now  thought  he  had  bathed  enough,  he  went  to  Jericho, 
which  was  very  near,  and  there  lay  aipon  his  death-bed.  What  a 
death-bed  it  was !  Herod  grew  more  passionate  and  cruel  as  he 
grew  worse.  One  day  he  called  for  an  apple.  His  servants  brought 
him  one,  as  well  as  a  knife  to  pare  it.  When  he  saw  the  knife,  he 
looked  around  to  see  whether  any  body  was  watching  him,  and, 
thinking  he  was  not  noticed,  he  took  the  knife,  and  was  just  going 
to  stab  himself ;  but  one  of  his  cousins  saw  what  he  was  going  to 
do,  and  seized  hold  of  his  hand,  and  cried  out  with  a  loud  voice. 
The  servants  came  running  to  see  what  was  the  matter,  and  when 
the  cousin  told  them  how  Herod  had  tried  to  kill  himself,  they  be- 
gan to  make  a  great  noise,  as  if  they  were  much  grieved,  but,  of 
course,  their  sorrow  was  all  pretense. 

There  was  a  prince  in  a  prison  not  far  off,  and  he  heard  some 
one  say  that  the  king  was  dead.  This  prince  was  the  eldest  son  of 
Herod,  and  he  was  shut  up  in  prison  because  he  had  once  tried  to 
poison  his  father.  Now  he  was  full  of  hope  that  the  jailer  would  let 
him  go,  and  he  promised  to  reward  him  if  he  would ;  but,  instead 
of  letting  him  go,  this  jailer  went  and  told  the  king,  and  the  king 
was  so  angry  that  he  cried  out,  and  beat  his  own  head  in  his  rage. 
Then  he  raised  himself  on  one  elbow  in  his  bed,  and  called  for  one 
of  his  soldiers,  and  told  him  to  go  immediately  and  kill  the  prince. 
The  soldier  went  to  the  prison  and  executed  this  wicked  son.  Five 
days  afterward  Herod  died. 

And  did  any  one  lament  his  death  ?  No  one.  I  am  sure  those 
poor  mothers  did  not,  who  had  lately  lost  their  youngest  darlings. 
However,  Herod  had  a  magnificent  funeral.  His  son,  Archelaus, 
ordered  that  the  dead  body  should  be  dressed  in  purple  robes,  and 
that  a  crown  should  be  placed  on  its  head,  and  a  sceptre  in  its 
hands.  Thus  arrayed,  the  loathsome  corpse  was  placed  in  a  golden 
coffin,  adorned  with  many  precious  stones,  and  covered  with  a  pur- 
ple wrapper.    A  long  train  of  princes — Herod's  .sons  and  relations — 


THE    CARPENTEK.  43 

followed  the  coffin  ;  and  then  came  a  whole  army  of  soldiers  ;  and, 
lastly,  five  hundred  servants,  bearing  fragrant  spices.  And  yet  not 
one  tear  was  shed  by  all  these  thousands  of  people  ! 

Matt.,  ii.,  16-18. 
THE    MOTHERS'    GRIEF. 

"  Rachel  weeping  for  her  children,  and 
would  not  be  comforted,  because  they  are 
not."— Matt.,  ii.,  18. 

Why  are  the  mothers  called  Rachel  ?     Because  Rachel  was  un- 
happy about  her  baby,  little  Benjamin,  thinking  he  would  die. 


LESSON  X. 

THE    CARPENTER. 
A  POOR  man  is  leading  an  ass  through  a  desert.    A 


-"■o 


gentle  mother  and  her  babe  are  riding  on  the  ass. 
That  babe  is  now  old  enough  to  walk  and  to  talk. 
How  sweet  to  hear  his  remarks  and  his  questions  as 
he  travels  along  in  his  mother's  fond  arms !  It  is  the 
most  loving  and  the  most  lovely  child  ever  seen  in 
this  world;  for  it  is  as  meek  as  a  lamb,  and  as  pure 
as  a  lily. 

The  kind  man  who  guides  the  ass  through  the 
sandy  desert  comes  at  last  to  the  fair  land  of  Canaan. 


44  THE    CARPENTER. 

He  seems  uncertain  which,  way  to  take.  He  is  look- 
ing toward  those  stony  hills  where  the  babe  was  born ; 
but  he  asks  questions  of  the  people  he  meets,  and 
when  he  hears  their  answers  he  does  not  go  where  he 
wishes,  but  takes  another  road,  and  goes  nearly  a 
hundred  miles  farther,  till  he  comes  to  some  green 
and  flowery  hills.  He  enters  a  town  built  on  the 
west  side  of  a  hill.  The  people  know  him  well ;  they 
seem  to  be  his  old  friends  and  neighbors;  and  they 
know  his  wife  too,  but  they  have  never  seen  the 
babe  before.  Oh,  what  long  journeys  that  babe  has 
taken!  What  cold  night -blasts  chilled  his  tender 
limbs  when  fleeing  from  the  cruel  Herod !  What  hot 
suns  have  beat  on  his  gentle  head !  Over  what  rough 
paths  has  he  been  hurried !  In  what  mean  hovels  has 
he  taken  shelter  since  he  lay  in  the  manger ! 

And  now,  to  what  kind  of  a  home  has  he  come? 
To  a  lowly  abode  in  a  carpenter's  yard.  His  mother's 
husband  saws  wood,  and  hammers  in  the  nails. 

That  dear  child  is  ready  to  work  whenever  his  pa- 
rents command  him. 

Yet  it  is  He  by  whom  the  heavens  and  the  earth 
were  made. 

When  he  looks  at  the  wood  and  the  nails  in  his  pa- 
rents' yard,  does  he  think  of  the  cross  of  wood  on 
which  he  will  one  day  be  nailed  f 


THE    JOYFUL    JOURNEY.  45 

Why  did  Joseph  leave  Egypt?  Because  an  angel  told  him 
Herod  was  dead. 

AYhv  does  he  not  go  and  live  at  Bethlehem  or  Jerusalem  ?  Be- 
cause he  heard  that  Herod's  wicked  son,  Archelaus,  was  king  oyer 
that  part  of  the  land. 

To  what  town  does  he  go  ? 

Luke,  ii.,  19,  to  end. 

Joseph's  abode. 
aAnd  he  came  and  dwelt  in  a  city  called 
Nazareth." — Luke,  ii.,  23. 


LESSON  XL 
THE  joyful  journey. 

It  is  the  first  month  of  spring.  The  green  grass  is 
gaudy  with  scarlet  lilies,  poppies,  and  tulips. 

The  little  town  on  the  side  of  the  hill  is  full  of 
movement.  A  great  company  of  people  are  setting 
out  on  a  journey.  Women  are  riding  upon  asses. 
They  screen  their  eyes  from  the  sun  with  the  shawls 
which  cover  their  heads.  The  men  are  walking,  with 
sandals  on  their  feet  and  turbans  on  their  heads. 
Their  robes  are  of  blue,  or  red,  or  white,  and  are  fast- 
ened with  girdles. 


46  THE    WISE    CHILD. 

There  are  not  many  children  in  that  company ;  but 
there  is  one,  about  twelve  years  old,  whom  all  the 
neighbors  seem  to  love.  He  never  joins  with  other 
children  in  rude  play  or  wild  tricks,  but  he  loves 
singing  psalms  with  those  who  fear  God. 

How  sweet  are  the  words  of  the  psalm  sung  by  that 
company !  "I  was  glad  when  they  said  unto  me,  Let 
us  go  into  the  house  of  the  Lord." 

From  what  town  are  that  company  going? 
To  what  town  are  they  going? 
What  are  they  going  there  for? 

Luke,  ii.,  41,  42. 
THE    YOUTHFUL    SAVIOUR. 

"  And  Jesus  increased  in  wisdom  and  stat- 
ure, and  in  favor  with  God  and  man." — Luke, 
ii.,  52. 


LESSON  XII. 

THE    WISE    CHILD. 

Behold  that  beautiful  city  built  upon  hills !  On 
the  top  of  one  of  those  hills  there  is  a  grand  building 
of  marble  and  gold.  There  are  courts  around  it :  each 
court  is  higher  than  the  other. 


<tHE    WISE    CHILD.  47 

A  sorrowful  man,  with  his  sorrowful  wife,  ascends 
the  hill,  and  enters  the  lowest  court.  It  is  a  fine  place, 
with  a  pavement  of  colored  marbles,  and  surrounded 
by  stone  walls. 

There  is  a  large  hall  in  this  court.  The  roof  is  of 
cedar  wood,  supported  by  pillars  of  marble.  The  two 
sorrowful  persons  enter  this  hall.  There  are  other 
halls  in  this  court,  but  this  is  the  chief  of  all  the  halls. 

What  do  these  two  mourners  see  when  they  enter 
the  hall  ?  They  see  old  men,  with  long  gray  beards, 
sitting  on  high  seats,  and  at  their  feet  many  youths, 
sitting  on  the  floor,  listening  to  their  words. 

Among  those  youths  there  is  one  who  answers  bet- 
ter than  all  the  rest.  Every  one  is  surprised  to  hear 
his  answers.  Every  one  is  surprised,  also,  to  hear  his 
questions,  for  they  are  such  wise  and  such  hard  ques- 
tions. Yet  how  humble  that  boy  seems !  He  is  not 
seeking  to  be  praised  or  admired. 

The  sorrow  of  the  woman  is  changed  into  joy  as 
soon  as  she  sees  that  boy.  She  speaks  to  him ;  she 
does  not  seem  to  be  quite  pleased  with  him,  though 
her  face  beams  with  the  fondest  love. 

The  boy  answers  her  with  affection  and  respect,  yet 
with  all  the  majesty  of  a  young  prince,  though  yet  he 
is  only  a  poor  boy.  Soon  he  rises  from  his  lowly 
seat,  and  follows  his  two  kind  friends. 


48  THE    WISE    CHILD. 

What  city  is  that? 

What  is  the  beautiful  building  on  the  top  of  a  hill? 

What  hall  is  that?  The  temple  was  surrounded  by  courts. 
Into  the  court  just  round  the  temple  none  but  priests  entered; 
into  the  court  beyond  all  the  men  of  Israel  might  enter;  into  the 
court  beyond  that,  women  as  well  as  men  might  enter;  and  into 
the  outermost  court  all  nations  might  come,  both  men  and  women. 
This  court  was  called  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles.  In  this  court 
•here  were  many  buildings,  where  Levites  resided.  One  of  these 
halls  was  a  place  where  youths  were  taught  by  the  elders.  It 
was  also  used  as  a  synagogue,  or  place  of  worship. 

Who  are  the  two  sorrowful  people  ? 

What  is  the  reason  of  their  sorrow? 

What  does  the  mother  say  to  her  son? 

What  does  he  answer? 

What  is  the  meaning  of  "  Wist  ye  not?"  It  means,  "Do  you 
not  know?" 

Luke,  ii.,  42-53, 
THE  LORD'S  ANSWER  TO  HIS  MOTHER. 

uHow  is  it  that  ye  sought  me?  Wist  ye 
not  that  I  must  be  about  my  Father's  busi- 
ness?"— Luke,  ii,  49. 


THE  RIVER  BETWEEN  ROCKS. 

LESSON  XIII. 

THE    EARNEST    PREACHER. 

A  riyer  flows  between  steep  banks.     There  are 
mountains  on  each  side  the  river. 

Among  those   mountains  a  man  lives   all  alone. 

D 


50  THE    EARNEST    PREACHER. 

He  wears  a  garment  of  the  coarsest  brown  cloth,  and 
a  girdle  made  of  skin.  He  looks  like  one  who  has  al- 
ways lived  in  the  open  air,  or  slept  in  a  cave;  he 
looks  like  one  who  has  been  wet  with  the  dews  of 
night,  and  scorched  by  the  noonday  sun.  The  skin 
of  such  a  man  must  be  brown  and  hard,  and  his  hair 
must  be  long  and  thick. 

Now  the  lonely  man  is  sitting  under  a  tree,  eating 
his  simple  meal.  He  can  not  get  bread  in  that  deso- 
late place.  What,  then,  are  those  little  morsels  he  is 
putting  into  his  mouth?  They  are  small  animals, 
which  live  on  grass  and  leaves ;  they  are  not  bigger 
than  a  child's  finger.  The  lonely  man  finds  them  in 
the  desert,  and  lives  upon  them.  He  searches  in  the 
hollow  trees,  and  he  finds  there  sweet  stuff  fit  to  eat. 
"When  he  is  thirsty  he  drinks  of  the  water  of  the  river, 
or  of  the  rivulets  that  flow  down  the  mountain  side. 
He  seems  to  be  happy  in  his  desert,  and  not  to  wish 
to  go  to  the  towns.  He  is  often  speaking  to  One  who 
can  not  be  seen,  and  he  is  often  hearing  One  speak  to 
him  from  Heaven. 

What  crowds  of  people  are  coming  toward  the  lone- 
ly man!  From  all  parts  the  crowds  are  hastening. 
Now  they  have  gathered  round  that  holy  man.  Now 
they  are  listening  to  his  voice.  There  is  one  word 
the  preacher  often  utters.  The  people  tremble,  they 
weep,  they  pray. 


THE    EARNEST    PREACHER. 


51 


But  there  are  some  men  standing  by  with  proud 
and  scornful  looks.  They  wear  fine  and  costly  gar- 
ments. The  preacher  observes  their  sneers  and  their 
jeers. 

He  is  not  afraid  of  them.     He  turns  toward  them, 


52  ■       THE    EARNEST    PREACHER. 


JOHN   TEACHING. 


and  speaks  to  them  with  a  holy  anger.     But  these 
scoffers  do  not  care  for  his  warnings. 

Who  is  that  man? 
Whose  son  is  he? 
Where  is  he  preaching? 

How  long  has  he  been  in  that  place?      Ever  since  he  was  a 
child.     Luke,  i.,  80. 

What  is  his  garment  made  of? 

What  does  he  eat? 

What  word  does  he  often  utter  in  his  sermon?     "Repent" 

Who  are  his  proud  hearers  ? 

What  terrible  name  does  he  call  them  by?     Vipers. 

Matt.,  iii.,  1-7. 

John's  warning  to  the  Pharisees. 
"Who  hath  warned  you  to  flee  from  the 
wrath  to  comeT1 — Matt.,  iii.,  7. 


;:wi^ 


<&& 


wmm 


JOHN  BAPTIZING  LS  JOEDAN. 


LESSON  XIV. 


THE   HOLY   DOVE. 

Close  by  the  river-side,  among  the  trees  on  the 
banks,  the  preacher  is  standing.  Who  are  these  com- 
ing toward  him,  with  tears  on  their  cheeks?  They 
are  poor  men,  clothed  in  coarse  garments.  The 
preacher  receives  them  kindly,  and  goes  with  them 
to  the  water.  He  bathes  them  in  the  jiver,  and  prays 
with  them. 

What  crowds  are  standing  by  the  river's  edge,  anx- 


I 

54  THE    HOLY    DOVE. 

ious  to  be  washed  in  the  stream !  But  they  are  all 
poor ;  none  of  the  proud  men  go  with  the  preacher 
into  the  water. 

Here  comes  one  man,  more  humble  than  all  the 
rest.  Yet,  when  the  preacher  sees  him,  he  speaks  to 
him  with  the  greatest  respect,  as  if  he  were  speaking 
to  a  king — yes,  with  still  more  respect.  j  He  seems 
unwilling  to  go  with  him  into  the  water,  but  the  hum- 
ble man  persuades  him  to  lead  him  there. 

They  are  now  coming  up  out  of  the  water  together, 
praying. 

Look  up !  What  is  that  brightness  ?  Nothing  on 
earth  was  ever  seen  so  bright.  And  who  is  flying 
down  from  Heaven  ?  It  is  no  bird  of  earth,  yet  it  is 
One  who  is  like  a  dove,  even  the  Holy  Spirit  of  God ; 
and  the  Holy  Spirit  rests  upon  the  head  of  that  bless- 
ed One,  praying  in  the  water. 

Hark !  what  is  that  sound  ?  It  is  a  voice,  yet  not 
the  voice  of  man,  nor  the  voice  of  angel.  It  is  a  voice 
uttering  some  joyful,  yet  awful  words. 

How  earnestly  the  preacher  listens  to  the  sound ! 

"With  what  deep  respect  he  looks  upon  the  man 
who  came  to  him  so  humbly ! 

What  river  is  that? 

"Who  is  the  preacher? 

What  is  it  he  does  to  the  people  in  the  river  ?    He  baptizes  them. 


THE    DREADFUL    DESERT.  55 

Why  does  he  baptize  them?  As  a  sign  that  God  washes  away 
the  sins  of  repenting  sinners  in  precious  blood. 

What  did  John  say  when  Jesus  came  to  be  baptized? 

What  did  Jesus  answer? 

What  did  the  Father  say  from  Heaven? 

Who  are  the  Trinity? 

Were  the  three  Persons  all  seen  and  heard  at  this  baptism  ? 
Yes ;  the  Father  was  heard,  the  Spirit  was  seen,  and  the  Son  was 
seen  and  heard  (for  he  was  praying). 

Matt.,  iii.,  13-17.  Mark,  i.,  9-11.  Luke,  iii.,  21,  22. 
THE  WORDS  OF  THE  FATHER  TO  HIS  SON. 

"Thou  art  my  beloved  Son,  in  whom  I  am 
well  pleased." — Mark,  i.,  11. 


LESSON  XV. 

THE    DREADFUL    DESERT. 

What  a  dismal,  lonely  place !  The  mountains  are 
steep  and  rugged;  the  valleys  are  dark  and  gloomy. 
There  are  deep  caves  where  wild  beasts  hide  them- 
selves. How  horrible  is  the  sound  of  the  lion's  roar 
and  of  the  wolf's  howl!  There  is  hardly  any  grass 
upon  the  dry  ground,  but  great  stones  lie  scattered 
there. 

See  a  man  sitting  among  the  stones !  How  sorrow- 
ful he  looks !     He  rises  now,  and  walks  and  weeps. 


56 


THE    DREADFUL    DESERT. 


____ 


CHRIST  IN  THE  WILDERNESS. 


It  seems  as  if  some  one  were  pursuing  him,  but  no 
one  can  be  seen  besides  himself.  Why  does  he  bend 
his  face  toward  the  ground,  and  kneel  and  pray,  and 
cry  out  for  help  ?  Of  what  is  he  afraid  ?  The  wild 
beasts  do  not  come  near  him ;  men  can  not  live  in 
that  barren  place.  What  can  fill  that  lonely  man 
with  such  trouble  ? 

Watch  him  from  morning  to  night.  You  will 
never  see  him  sitting  by  a  stream,  drinking  of  its 
water,  nor  eating  a  morsel  of  food.  He  eats  neither 
locusts  nor  honey. 


THE    LAMB.  57 

Yet  he  goes  on  from  day  to  day,  living,  and  weep- 
ing, and  praying. 

Who  is  the  sorrowful  man  who  eats  no  food  in  the  desert? 

How  long  does  he  remain  there? 

Who  pursues  and  torments  him  there? 

Who  led  him  into  the  desert?  The  Holy  Spirit;  that  Spirit 
which  had  just  descended  upon  him  at  his  baptism. 

Why  does  he  suffer  so  much  from  Satan?  To  save  us  from 
Satan. 

Matt.,  iv.,  1,  2.      Mark,  i.,  12,  13.      Luke,  iv.,  1,  2. 

Christ's  temptations. 
"  He  was  there  in  the  wilderness  forty  days, 
tempted  of  Satan;    and  was  with  the  wild 
beasts." — Mark,  i.,  13. 


LESSON  XVI. 

THE    LAMB. 

The  preacher  is  standing  in  the  wilderness,  among 
the  trees  and  hills,  not  far  from  the  river. 

People  are  standing  around,  listening  to  the  preach- 
er's words. 

Suddenly  he  looks  glad.  He  sees  something  at  a 
little  distance  which  pleases  him.     He  points  that 


58  THE   saviour's  home. 

way,  and  speaks.     There  is  a  Man  coming  toward 
hira. 

That  man  is  not  clad,  like  the  preacher,  in  a  gar- 
ment of  camel's  hair.  He  is  dressed  like  any  poor 
man.  But  his  face  is  more  meek  and  holy  than  any 
other  face. 

What  does  the  preacher  see  a  little  way  off  to  make  him  glad  ? 

What  words  does  he  speak  when  he  sees  Jesus? 

Was  the  preacher  in  the  same  wilderness  that  Jesus  was  tempt- 
ed in  ?  No ;  for  there  were  no  people  in  the  wilderness  with 
Jesus,  only  wild  beasts. 

John,  i.,  29-31. 
THE    WORDS    OF    JOHN    TO   THE    PEOPLE. 

"  Behold  the  Lamb  of  God,  which  taketh 
away  the  sin  of  the  world.11 — John,  i.,  29. 


LESSON  XVII. 

THE    SAVIOUR'S    HOME. 

There,  again,  is  the  preacher  in  the  wilderness. 
To-day  he  looks  as  joyful  as  he  did  yesterday.  There 
are  two  of  his  friends  standing  close  by  him,  listening 
to  his  words. 

The  preacher  speaks.     There  is  the  same  man  who 


THE    SAVIOUR'S    HOME.  59 

was  seen  yesterday ;  he  is  walking  along  at  a  little 
distance ;  he  will  soon  have  passed  by  and  be  out  of 
sight.  The  two  men  standing  near  the  preacher  leave 
him,  and  go  after  the  man  who  is  passing  by.  They 
want  to  know  him  better.  They  do  not  venture  to 
go  np  to  him  and  speak  to  him ;  they  only  walk  be- 
hind him. 

What  joy  for  them !  That  blessed  man  stops  and 
turns,  and  speaks  so  kindly.  He  speaks  only  a  few 
words.  The  two  men  answer  him  in  a  few  words, 
and  he  answers  them  in  a  very  few  more. 

But  see !  the  three  are  now  walking  together.  How 
happy  now  those  two  friends  seem !  What  a  sweet 
walk  they  are  taking  in  the  wilderness ! 

At  last  they  reach  a  lowly  dwelling.  All  three  go 
in  together.  It  is  the  afternoon.  There  is  time  for 
much  talking  together  before  dark. 

In  the  evening  those  friends  take  leave  of  the  mas- 
ter of  the  house.  Will  they  ever  forget  the  happy 
hours  they  spent  with  him  ?  Surely  this  is  the  hap- 
piest day  they  have  ever  passed. 

What  did  John  say  the  second  time  he  saw  Jesus  walking  ? 

Who  are  the  two  men  with  him?  One  is  Andrew;  the  other 
we  do  not  know,  but  we  suppose  it  was  John,  because  John  wrote 
this  account,  and  so  he  may  have  preferred  concealing  his  name. 

Were  Andrew  and  John  brothers?  No;  they  were  partners  in 
the  trade  of  fishing.  Luke,  v.,  10.  Andrew  had  a  brother  named 
Simon,  and  John  had  a  brother  named  James. 


60  THE    SAVIOUR'S    HOME. 

How  do  you  distinguish  the  two  Johns  ?  "We  call  one  John 
the  Baptist,  and  the  other  John  the  Apostle. 

What  were  the  first  words  Jesus  spoke  to  Andrew  and  his  friend  ? 

What  did  they  reply  ? 

What  did  Jesus  reply? 

At  what  hour  did  Jesus  reach  his  dwelling  ?     About  four  o'clock. 

How  do  you  know  that?  Because  it  is  written  in  John,  i.,  39, 
"It  was  about  the  tenth  hour."  The  Jews  began  to  reckon  their 
hours  from  six  o'clock  in  the  morning ;  therefore  the  tenth  hour 
is  four  o'clock. 

John,  i.,  35-40. 

Christ's  invitation. 
"Come  and  see." — John,  i.?  39. 


THE  MARRIAGE  IN  CANA. 


LESSON  XVIII. 


THE   FEAST. 

How  glad  the  people  seem  to-day  in  that  little 
town !  It  is  a  town  among  the  green  hills,  where  fig- 
trees  and  flowers  are  growing.  It  is  a  town  a  few 
miles  from  Nazareth. 

What  makes  the  town  so  gay  this  evening?  Peo- 
ple, dressed  in  their  best  clothes,  are  entering  a  house 
where  a  feast  is  prepared. 

And  why  is  this  feast  prepared?  To  do  honor  to 
a  marriage  that  has  just  been  made. 


62  THE    FEAST. 

The  bridegroom  and  the  bride  are  there,  but  it  is 
not  they  who  arrange  the  feast.  There  is  a  man  call- 
ed the  "ruler,"  who  takes  all  the  trouble  of  receiving 
the  guests  and  directing  the  servants. 

Behold  the  company  seated  round  the  tables,  eating 
and  drinking,  while  the  servants  wait  upon  them. 

Among  the  guests  there  is  one  very  sorrowful  man. 
Though  he  is  sorrowful,  he  has  a  heart  that  longs  to 
make  every  body  glad.  Some  very  dear  friends  have 
come  with  him  to  the  feast ;  they  are  very  poor  men, 
only  fishermen.  There  is  a  woman,  rather  old,  who 
looks  with  fond  affection  upon  the  sorrowful  man. 
She  is  a  humble,  holy,  and  poor  woman. 

There  are  many  empty  cups  on  the  table.  "Why  do 
not  the  servants  fill  them  with  wine?  But  the  bot- 
tles and  the  jugs  are  empty  too. 

See,  the  servants  are  filling  six  large  jars  with  wa- 
ter. They  fill  them  quite  full.  Are  they  going  to 
give  the  people  water  to  drink  ? 

A  servant  is  filling  a  cup  from  one  of  those  jars. 
But  there  seems  to  be  wine  in  the  cup. 

A  servant  presents  the  cup  to  the  ruler.  He  tastes 
it ;  he  is  astonished.  He  is  now  speaking  to  the  bride- 
groom. 

The  servants  are  speaking  now;  they  are  telling 
something  which  surprises  the  guests.     Every  eye  is 


WATER- JARS. 


THE    FEAST.  65 

now  fixed  upon  that  sorrowful  man,  and  every  mouth 
is  opened  in  wonder.  Even  the  friends  who  came 
with  the  sorrowful  man  are  surprised. 

But  there  is  one  person  who  is  not  surprised.  That 
elderly  woman  at  the  table  expected  to  see  this  mira- 
cle. As  soon  as  ever  the  wine  was  gone,  she  expect- 
ed that  more  wine  would  be  supplied  through  the 
wonderful  power  of  that  sorrowful  man.  Yet  she  had 
never  seen  him  perform  a  miracle  before,  but  she  knew 
he  was  the  Son  of  God,  and  that  he  could  do  every 
thing. 

What  town  is  that? 

What  was  the  use  of  those  stone  jars?  They  were  for  the 
guests  to  wash  their  hands  in  before  dinner,  and  for  other  wash- 
ings besides. 

Why  is  every  one  at  table  so  much  surprised  at  the  water  be- 
ing turned  into  wine?  Because  this  was  the  first  miracle  which 
Jesus  did. 

Who  alone  is  not  surprised?     His  mother. 

What  does  she  say  which  showed  she  expected  this  miracle  to 
be  done? 

What  does  the  ruler  of  the  feast  say  in  praise  of  the  wine  ? 

Can  you  think  of  any  reason  why  Jesus  should  begin  his  mir- 
acles by  turning  water  into  wine?  Perhaps  it  was  to  show  us 
that  he  came  into  the  world  that  we  might  come  to  a  feast  above, 
where  there  should  be  abundance  of  wine. 

What  sort  of  a  feast  will  that  be  ?  It  will  be  a  marriage  feast, 
yet  not  like  any  earthly  feast,  nor  will  the  wine  be  like  earthly 
wine.  It  will  be  a  feast  of  love  and  joy  in  honor  of  the  marriage 
of  the  Lamb.     See  Rev.,  xix.,  7-9. 

John,  ii.,  1-12. 

E 


66  THE    MARKET. 

THE    FIRST    MIRACLE. 

"This  beginning  of  miracles  did  Jesus  in 
Cana  of  Galilee,  and  manifested  forth  his 
glory;  and  his  disciples  believed  on  him." — 
John,  ii.,  11. 


LESSON  XIX. 

THE    MARKET. 


Behold  that  great  city  built  upon  hills !  What  a 
splendid  building  there  is  in  the  midst!  How  high 
it  is  lifted  up  above  the  streets  of  the  city  I 

Go  up  into  that  splendid  place.  There  is  a  beauti- 
ful gate.  Go  through.  You  find  yourself  in  a  large 
court,  with  a  curious  pavement  of  colored  stones. 

See  that  flight  of  steps !  Many  people  are  going  up 
those  steps  into  another  court.  But  you  must  not, 
unless  you  are  a  Jew.  As  you  are  a  Gentile,  you 
must  remain  in  this  court  below.  Here  Gentiles  may 
come  and  pray  to  God.  s 

What  handsome  halls  are  built  all  round  this 
court!  The  roofs  are  of  cedar,  supported  by  pillars 
of  marble. 


THE    MARKET.  67 

In  one  of  those  great  halls  there  a^e  sheep  and  oxen. 
How  strange  to  see  beasts  in  such  a  hall  as  that ! 

What  can  they  have  been  brought  here  for  ?  There 
are  men  standing  by  the  beasts.  Other  men  come  to- 
ward them.  One  looks  at  a  lamb,  asks  the  price,  pays 
the  money,  and  takes  it  away  with  him.  Another 
chooses  an  ox  and  pays  for  it,  and  then  leads  it  along. 
What  a  noise  the  men  make  as  they  are  disputing 
about  the  price !  and  what  a  noise  the  poor  animals 
make  as  they  wait  in  the  court !  Whcr  can  hear  the 
sweet  singing  of  the  psalms  in  the  court  above  amid 
this  bleating  and  this  lowing  ? 

There  is  a  softer  sound.  It  is  the  gentle  cooings  of 
some  doves  shut  up  in  cages.  There  are  some  parents 
with  a  little  baby,  and  they  are  buying  a  pair  of 
doves,  and  they  take  them  to  the  court  above. 

Some  people  seem  to  be  praying.  How  can  they 
pray  amid  this  confusion  ? 

There  are  tables,  with  little  chests  of  money  upon 
them,  and  men  sitting  beside  them.  Now  a  man 
comes  up  and  puts  some  money  on  the  table,  and  the 
man  sitting  by  it  gives  him  another  sort  of  money  in 
exchange.  The  other  man  takes  it,  and  goes  up  the 
steps  toward  the  temple.  There  is  much  cheating  at 
those  money -tables.  One  says,  "You  gave  me  too 
little ;"  and  the  other  declares  he  gave  him  too  much. 
What  a  shocking  scene  ! 


68 


THE    MARKET. 


There  is  a  man  with  a  sorrowful  countenance 
watching  all  that  passes.  He  looks  more  sorrowful 
every  moment.  At  last  he  stoops  down  and  picks  up 
some  of  the  rushes  on  which  the  oxen  are  treading, 
and  twists  these  rushes  into  a  switch  or  a  whip ;  and 
now  he  begins  with  that  switch  to  drive  out  the  sheep 
and  the  oxen.  The  sellers  of  the  beasts  do  not  hinder 
him,  but  go  out  with  their  droves  and  their  flocks. 
Then  that  holy  man  throws  down  the  tables,  and  the 


JE8US  DRIVING  THE  MONEY-CHANGERS  OUT   OF   THE  TEMPLE. 


money  rolls  on  the  pavement.  But  he  does  not  up- 
set the  cages,  or  hurt  the  gentle  doves.  He  says  to 
the  dove-sellers,  "  Take  these  things  away ;"  and  they 


THE    SECRET    VISIT.  69 

take  them.     The  poor  man's  friends  seem  much  sur 
prised  at  what  he  is  doing. 

What  was  that  court  called  where  the  beasts  were  sold  ?  It 
was  called  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles,  because  even  Gentiles  might 
come  there. 

What  was  the  use  of  that  court  ?     For  people  to  pray  in. 

What  did  people  buy  animals  for?  To  offer  them  in  sacrifice 
to  God  on  the  great  altar. 

Why  was  it  wrong  to  sell  and  buy  in  that  court  ?  Because  that 
court  was  a  place  for  prayer  to  the  Father,  and  not  for  business 
with  the  world. 

Why  did  people  change  money?  Because  all  had  to  pay  half 
a  shekel  once  a  year  to  the  priests,  and  they  wanted  to  change 
whole  shekels  for  half  shekels.  A  shekel  was  worth  about  half  a 
crown,  and  therefore  half  a  shekel  was  fifteen  pence. 

What  did  Christ  say  as  he  drove  out  the  sellers? 

John,  ii.,  13-17. 
Christ's  words  to  the  sellers. 
"Make  not  my  Father's  house  an  house  of 
merchandise.11 — John,  ii.,  16. 


LESSON  XX. 
the  secret  visit. 
In  the  streets  of  that  great  city  a  man  is  walking  in 
the  dark.     He  goes  very  quietly  along,  as  if  he  did 
not  wish  to  be  seen. 

Is  he  a  thief?     He  does  not  look  like  a  thief,  but 
like  a  rich  and  honorable  man. 


70  THE    SECRET    VISIT. 

He  comes  to  a  house;  he  is  let  in;  he  enters  a 
room ;  he  sits  down  by  the  side  of  a  poor  man,  who 
lives  there. 

With  how  much  respect  he  treats  that  poor  man! 
He  seems  to  be  asking  him  questions.  He  listens  to 
the  poor  man's  answers  with  great  attention.  At  first 
he  seems  much  surprised ;  then  he  looks  very  serious. 

That  poor  man  speaks  with  the  majesty  of  a  king, 
yet  with  all  the  kindness  of  a  brother.  He  has  been 
teaching  all  day  long,  yet  he  sits  up  at  night  to  teach 
that  rich  man. 

Before  the  morning  comes  that  rich  man  goes  away, 
for  he  does  not  wish  any  one  to  meet  him  coming  out 
of  that  poor  man's  house. 

Who  is  that  man  walking  in  the  night? 
Why  does  he  come  to  Jesus  by  night,  and  not  in  the  day  ? 
What  did  he  hear  Jesus  say  which  surprised  him  very  much?" 
What  did  Jesus  say  afterward  about  his  own  coming  into  the 
world  ? 

John,  iii.,  1-18. 

Christ's  words  to  nicodemus. 
44  God  so  loved  the  world,  that  He  gave 
His    only-begotten  Son,   that   whosoever   be- 
lieveth  in  Him  should  not  perish,  but  have 
everlasting  life." — John,  iii.,  16. 


THE  WOMAN   OF   SAMARIA. 


LESSON  XXI. 


THE    WELL. 

There  are  $wo  high  hills.  Between  them  lies  a 
green  and  flowery  valley.  Corn-fields  smile  on  every 
side,  while  many  a  clump  of  olive-trees  gives  shade 
to  the  weary  laborer. 

In  all  that  sweet  land  there  is  not  so  sweet  a  valley 
as  this. 

There  is  a  small  town  built  in  an  open  part  of  the 


72  THE    WELL. 

valley.  About  a  mile  beyond  there  is  a  well,  shaded 
by  thick  trees. 

In  the  heat  of  the  day,  just  about  noon,  a  few  tired 
travelers  come  up  to  this  well.  One  of  them  sits  down 
close  beside  it,  but  the  others  go  on  toward  the  town. 

This  traveler,  who  is  left  all  alone  by  the  well, 
looks  very  weary  and  very  thirsty.  The  thick  trees 
shelter  him  from  the  scorching  rays  of  the  sun,  but 
the  well  affords  him  no  refreshment,  for  it  is  deep, 
and  there  is  no  bucket  to  let  down.  It  is  a  trial  to  a 
thirsty  man  to  see  water  and  not  be  able  to  taste  it. 

But  here  comes  a  woman  with  a  pail  in  her  hand. 
It  is  a  little  pail  made  of  skins.  That  woman  will 
surely  give  some  water  to  the  traveler ;  even  if  he 
does  not  ask,  she  will  offer  him  some. 

But  no,  she  does  not.  He  is  asking  humbly  and 
sweetly,  she  is  refusing  proudly  and  rudely. 

Is  the  traveler  angry  ?  No,  he  does  not  look  as  if 
he  was  offended.  Thirsty  as  he  is,  he  talks  to  the 
woman  in  the  kindest  manner.  She  begins  to  look 
less  proud ;  now  she  looks  ashamed.  She  speaks  re- 
spectfully to  the  stranger. 

But  who  are  these,  coming  with  loaves  of  bread 
from  the  town.  They  come  up  to  the  well;  they 
look  surprised,  but  they  say  not  a  word.  They  listen 
quietly  to  those  two  who  are  talking  at  the  well. 


•> 


•3=-        il~M@  .y 


THE    WELL.  75 

But  now  the  woman  looks  astonished — so  much  as- 
tonished that  she  can  not  go  on  talking.  She  sets  off 
running  to  the  town,  leaving  her  little  pail  standing 
by  the  well. 

Now  the  weary  travelers  are  going  to  dine  on  the 
food  they  have  brought  from  the  town.  They  can 
get  water  from  the  well,  for  the  woman  has  left  her 
little  pail.  But  He  who  was  so  thirsty  will  neither 
eat  nor  drink.  His  friends  press  him  to  take  some 
food,  but  he  refuses.  His  thoughts  are  taken  up  with 
something  better  than  bread,  better  than  water. 

There  is  the  sound  of  feet  approaching — of  many 
feet,  moving  fast.  Here  is  the  woman,  accompanied 
by  a  troop  of  her  neighbors,  all  anxious  to  see  the 
man  who  sits  by  the  well.  They  come  round  him ; 
they  listen  to  him;  and  now  they  are  leading  him. 
back  with  them  to  the  town.  How  delighted  they 
are  to  have  Jiis  company !  The  friends  of  that  man 
go  with  him.     They  sleep  that  night  in  the  town. 

The  next  day  the  kind  Teacher  must  leave  the 
place.  What  a  parting  there  is  between  him  and 
those  poor  people !  Many  who  did  not  love  him  at 
first,  love  him  now.  Oh,  how  they  wish  they  could 
keep  him  always  in  their  town !  And  that  woman, 
who  was  so  unkind  as  to  refuse  to  give  him  a  drop  of 
water,  would  readily  now  give  him  all  she  has,  for  she 
loves  him  above  all. 


76  THE    WELL. 

But  her  teacher  must  go  on  his  journey  with  his 
friends  to  other  towns. 

What  are  the  two  hills  on  each  side  of  that  valley?  The 
mountains  of  Ebal  and  Gerizim,  called  the  mountains  of  cursing 
and  blessing.      See  Deut.,  xxvii.,  12,  13. 

What  town  is  in  that  valley  ?  Sychar,  in  the  Old  Testament 
called  Shechem,  near  which  Jacob  lived  for  a  time.  Gen.,  xxxiii., 
18.* 

What  were  the  first  words  Jesus  spoke  to  the  woman  ? 

Why  did  she  refuse  his  request? 

Why  did  the  Jews  and  Samaritans  hate  one  another  so  much? 
Because  the  Samaritans  were  descended  from  various  strange  na- 
tions, placed  in  Samaria  by  the  King  of  Assyria.  Therefore  they 
were  despised  by  the  Jews.     2  Kings,  xvii.,  24. 

What  did  Jesus  promise  to  give  to  the  woman  if  she  asked? 

What  did  he  mean  by  "living  water?"     John,  vii.,  37-39. 

What  did  Jesus  say  which  astonished  this  woman  so  much  that 
she  left  her  water-pot  and  went  into  the  city?f 

John,  iv.,  5-42. 
THE  WORDS  OF  JESUS  TO  THE  WOMAN  OF  SAMARIA. 

u  Whosoever  drinketh  of  this  water  shall 
thirst  again ;  but  whosoever  drinketh  of  the 
water  that  I  shall  give  him  shall  never  thirst.'" 
— John,  iv.,  13,  14. 

*  In  this  passage  the  word  "  Shalem"  means  safety,  and  the  verse 
should  be  read  thus  :  "Jacob  came  in  safety  to  the  city  of  Shechem. " 

i  This  city,  called  Sychar,  received  Jesus  better  than  any  other 
city,  and  a  blessing  appears  to  rest  upon  it,  for  it  is  at  this  day  the 
most  flourishing  city  in  the  land.     Its  modern  name  is  Nablous. 


NAZARETH. 


LESSON  XXII. 


THE    CRUEL    CONGREGATION. 

In  that  small  town  on  the  side  of  a  hill  there  is  no 
splendid  building  of  marble  and  gold,  but  there  is  a 
place  toward  which  many  feet  are  bending  their  steps. 
In  that  building  there  are  benches,  on  which  men  sit 
in  rows.  The  women  sit  in  another  part  by  them- 
selves. There  are  children  also,  sitting  with  their 
mothers,  and  big  boys  sitting  with  their  fathers. 

There  is  no  pulpit  raised  up  on  high,  as  in  our 


78  THE    CRUEL    CONGREGATION. 

churches,  no  clergyman  in  his  gown,  nor  communion 
table  behind  the  rails ;  but,  instead  of  a  pulpit,  there 
is  a  high  bench  placed  opposite  the  other  benches. 
On  this  high  seat  several  wise  and  grave  men  are  sit- 
ting. There  is  a  desk  also,  and  there  is  at  one  end  a 
great  chest. 

A  man  with  a  sorrowful  and  humble  countenance 
enters  the  place.  Many  people  seem  to  know  him. 
All  eyes  are  fixed  upon  him,  as  if  he  was  some  won- 
derful person.  The  chief  man  in  the  place  invites 
him  to  sit  on'the  raised  bench.  How  different  is  his 
humble  look  from  the  proud  and  haughty  looks  of 
the  men  sitting  there ! 

Presently  he  is  desired  to  stand  at  the  desk  and 
read,  and  a  man  goes  to  the  chest  and  takes  out  a  roll 
of  parchment  and  presents  it  to  him. 

This  roll  is  covered  with  writing. 

The  humble  man  begins  to  read,  and  while  he  is 
reading  the  whole  congregation  look  at  him  most  ear- 
nestly. 

He  reads  a  few  verses,  then  gives  back  the  roll  to 
the  man  who  has  the  care  of  the  chest.  He  sits  down. 
Every  body  is  longing  to  hear  what  he  is  going  to 
say.  At  first  all  the  people  seem  pleased ;  soon  they 
look  disappointed ;  now  they  look  angry — more  and 
more  angry;  at  last  furious.     They  can  not  contain 


THE    CRUEL    CONGREGATION. 


79 


their  rage ;  they  rush  from  their  seats ;  they  turn  the 
preacher  out  of  the  place ;  they  hunt  him  up  the  steep 
street,  as  hounds  hunt  the  innocent  deer ;  they  hurry 
him  to  the  edge  of  the  hill ;  they  drive  him  toward 
the  precipice ;  they  would  fain  hurl  Him  down  and 
dash  him  to  pieces ;  but — but  he  is  gone ;  no  one  can 
find  him ;  he  has  escaped. 


tfr  ^YC^'fcVfcNX -VSV.  «^  - 


THE   TUMULT   AT   NAZARETH. 


His  enemies  are  disappointed,  as  dogs  that  have 
lost  an  innocent  deer  they  were  going  to  devour. 


80  THE    CRUEL    CONGREGATION. 

What  town  is  that? 

What  building  is  it  where  people  assemble? 

What  part  of  the  Bible  was  written  on  that  roll  ? 

What  verses  did  Jesus  read? 

Who  gave  the  roll  to  Jesus?  The  minister  or  servant  who  had 
the  care  of  the  synagogue. 

What  did  Jesus  say  in  his  sermon  which  made  the  people  so 
angry?  He  spoke  of  two  Gentiles  to  whom  God  had  granted 
great  favors. 

Who  were  those  Gentiles  ?  The  widow  of  Zarephath,  and  Naa- 
man  the  Syrian. 

Why  were  the  people  angry  at  hearing  God  was  kind  to  Gen- 
tiles ?  Because  they  wanted  Jesus  to  be  kind  to  Jews  only,  and 
especially  to  them.  They  wanted  him  to  do  a  great  many  mira- 
cles in  their  city. 

How  did  Jesus  escape  from  those  wicked  men  ?  By  the  power 
of  God  his  Father,  who  saved  him  out  of  all  danger  till  his  time 
to  die  was  come. 

How  cruel  were  the  men  of  Nazareth !  How  hind  were  the  men 
of  Sychar!  Yet  Jesus  had  been  brought  up  in  Nazareth,  while 
he  was  a  stranger  in  Sychar;  but  so  it  is;  some  who  have  heard 
much  of  Jesus  hate  him,  while  others  who  know  very  little  about 
him  love  him. 

Luke,  iv.,  16-30. 
THE  WORDS  JESUS  READ  OUT  OF  THE  ROLL. 

"The  Spirit  of  the  Lord  is  upon  me,  be- 
cause He  hath  anointed  me  to  preach  the  Gos- 
pel to  the  poor.11 — Luke,  iv.,  18. 


THE  LAKE  OP   GEN  NES  ABET 


LESSON  XXIII. 

THE   FOUR    FISHERMEN. 

Among  the  green  hills  there  is  a  large  piece  of  w  a- 
ter  called  a  lake.  Its  waters  do  not  run  along  like 
the  waters  of  a  river ;  they  are  calm  and  still,  except 
when  the  wind  blows  roughly.  That  lake  is  so  large 
that  you  can  scarcely  see  the  land  on  the  other  side. 

F 


82  THE    FOUR    FISHERMEN, 

If  you  were  to  walk  round  the  lake,  you  would  travel 
forty  miles,  so  that  a  child  would  be  at  least  a  week 
in  making  the  journey  on  foot. 

There  are  a  great  many  little  ships  on  that  lake; 
some  are  for  fishing,  and  some  are  for  carrying  goods 
across  from  one  town  to  another. 

"What  a  great  crowd  of  people  are  standing  on  the 
green  banks !  but,  though  there  are  so  many,  they  are 
as  quiet  and  silent  as  the  waters  of  the  lake.  They 
seem  to  be  listening  with  great  attention  to  a  preacher 
who  is  standing  in  the  midst  of  them.  They  are  press- 
ing around  him  so  closely  that  he  can  scarcely  breathe 
or  move. 

The  preacher  knows  what  to  do. 

He  sees  two  little  fishing-ships  lying  close  by  the 
shore.  There  are  no  fishermen  in  them.  The  owners 
of  these  little  ships  are  on  the  beach,  washing  their 
nets.  Those  four  men  are  the  dearest  friends  of  the 
preacher.  That  preacher  knows  well  how  much  they 
love  him,  and  how  ready  they  are  to  lend  him  any 
thing.  He  calls  one  of  them.  The  man  comes  quick- 
ly, and  another  man  besides.  They  get  into  their  own 
ship.  The  preacher  enters  also.  Now  see,  the  fish- 
ermen are  pushing  their  little  ship  from  the  shore. 
They  do  not  push  it  far,  only  just  so  far  as  to  be  out 
of  the  reach  of  the  crowd. 


THE    FOUR    FISHERMEN.  83 

The  preacher  sits  down  where  he  can  be  well  seen 
and  heard,  and  begins  to  preach  a  sermon. 

The  people  sitting  on  the  green  banks  can  hear 
him  well. 

When  the  sermon  is  finished  the  fishermen  begin 
to  move  the  little  ship  farther  into  the  sea.  Now  they 
are  letting  down  a  net  from  the  side,  but  their  faces 
look  sad  as  they  let  it  down. 

Now  they  are  pulling  it  up ;  but  that  seems  hard 
work  indeed.  Yet  how  bright  the  faces  of  the  fish- 
ermen look !  The  heavier  the  net,  the  happier  they 
are. 

They  are  striving  and  striving  with  all  their  might, 
but  that  net  is  too  heavy ;  they  can  not  get  it  up  out 
of  the  water.  "What  can  they  do?  They  see  the 
other  little  ship  close  by.  The  fishermen  in  that  ship 
are  their  friends ;  they  come  to  help  in  pulling  up  the 
net.  All  four  pulling  together  succeed  in  getting  up 
the  net. 

Oh,  what  a  quantity  of  fish !  They  are  too  many 
for  one  ship  to  hold,  and  they  are  so  heavy  that  the 
net  is  broken ;  but  it  can  be  mended. 

The  fishermen  carry  some  of  the  fishes  into  the 
other  ship ;  both  ships  are  so  full  that  they  are  begin- 
ning to  sink.  The  fishes  must  be  brought. quickly  to 
land. 


84  THE    FOUR    FISHERMEN. 


PETES  AND  JAMES   CALLED. 


How  much,  astonished  those  fishermen  look !  One 
of  them  falls  upon  his  knees  at  the  preacher's  feet ;  it 
is  the  man  to  whom  the  ship  belongs.  The  poor  man 
seems  full  of  fear,  of  grief,  and  of  shame.  How  hum- 
ble and  how  thankful  he  looks !  The  preacher  speaks 
to  him  most  graciously,  and  cheers  his  spirits  by  his 
kind  words. 

When  they  all  reach  the  shore,  the  fishermen  leave 
their  ships  and  go  after  the  preacher. 

What  is  the  name  of  that  lake  ? 
To  whom  do  those  two  little  ships  belong  ? 
In  whose  ship  did  Jesus  preach  ? 
"Whom  did  he  desire  to  let  down  his  net  ? 
Why  did  this  fisherman  think  it  would  be  of  no  use  to  let  down 
his  net? 


THE    FOUR    FISHERMEN.  85 

What  did  he  say  when  he  fell  on  his  knees? 
What  did  Jesus  say  to  him  ? 

What  did  Jesus  mean  by  catching  men  ?      He   meant  saving 
souls  by  preaching  the  Gospel.      See  Matt.,  xiii.,  47. 

Matt.,  iv.,  18.      Mark,  i.,  17-21.      Luke,  v.,  1-12. 

peter's  words  to  jesus. 
"Depart  from  me;   for  I  am  a  sinful  man, 
O  Lord."— Luke,  v.,  8. 


OAPEENAUM. — THE  MAN   SICE!   OF  THE  PALSY. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

THE   MAN    WITH    FOUR   FRIENDS. 

There  are  several  towns  built  on  the  shores  of 
that  quiet  lake. 

In  one  of  those  towns  those  four  fishermen  live, 
who  had  two  little  ships  of  their  own.  The  preacher 
lives  there  also. 

The  people  in  that  town  are  fond  of  hearing  that 
preacher.    Whenever  they  see  him  they  crowd  around 


THE    MAN    WITH    FOUR    FRIENDS.  87 

hini  to  listen  to  his  words,  and  to  see  the  wonderful 
things  he  does. 

He  has  just  entered  into  a  house.  One  neighbor 
tells  another,  "I  saw  him  go  in." 

Immediately  the  people  begin  to  crowd  into  that 
house,  till  at  last  no  more  can  get  in.  Those  who  can 
not  get  in  stand  around  the  doors. 

Some  very  proud  and  learned  men  go  into  that 
house,  not  because  they  love  the  preacher,  for  they 
hate  him,  but  only  just  that  they  may  scoff  at  him, 
and  speak  against  him. 

Here  are  four  men  coming  along  the  streets  carry- 
ing something  on  their  shoulders.  Is  it  a  coffin  ?  No, 
it  is  a  bed — not  a  bedstead,  but  a  couch  or  mattress. 
The  man  lying  on  it  is  not  dead,  but  very  sick  and 
helpless. 

The  four  bed-bearers  are  trying  to  get  into  the 
house ;  it  is  of  no  use  trying ;  even  without  a  bed  they 
could  not  get  in.  How  much  disappointed  those  four 
men  look!  They  seem  to  love  the  sick  man  very 
much,  and  to  be  ready  to  take  any  trouble  to  get  him 
in.  Are  they  his  sons,  or  his  brothers,  or  only  his 
friends?  Whoever  they  are,  they  are  good,  kind- 
hearted  men ;  and,  more  than  that,  they  are  believing, 
for  they  seem  to  believe  that  the  preacher  can  do  great 
good  to  that  sick  man. 


88  THE    MAN    WITH    FOUR    FRIENDS. 

They  will  not  return  home  with  their  precious  bur- 
den ;  they  will  not  even  wait  till  the  crowd  is  gone. 

They  have  thought  of  a  plan.  They  are  climbing 
up  the  stairs  outside  the  house,  with  the  bed  on  their 
shoulders.     They  have  got  upon  the  flat  roof.     They 


HOCSE    WITH    FLAT   RijOV. 


THE    MAX   WITH    FOUR    FRIENDS.  89 

are  breaking  up  the  covering ;  they  are  letting  down 
the  bed  with  cords;  it  is  coming  down  just  at  the 
preacher's  feet. 

Is  the  preacher  displeased  at  his  sermon  being  in- 
terrupted ?  Oh  no !  oh  no !  he  is  much  pleased ;  he 
looks  kindly  at  the  sick  man.  He  speaks  to  him  ten- 
derly. How  glad  the  sick  man  seems  as  he  lies 
stretched  upon  his  bed ! 

Those  proud  people  who  went  into  the  house  to 
scoff  are  looking  very  angry. 

They  do  not  like  to  hear  those  kind  words  spoken 
to  the  sick  man.  But  the  preacher  cares  not  for  their 
frowns.  He  reproves  them  for  their  wicked  thoughts  ; 
then  he  turns  to  the  sick  man,  and  speaks  some  more 
words — words  of  majesty  and  power,  like  the  words 
of  God. 

Immediately  the  sick  man  springs  out  of  his  bed ; 
his  helpless  limbs  are  become  nimble  and  strong.  He 
is  walking  out  of  the  house  with  his  bed  upon  his 
back,  praising  God  as  he  goes. 

The  crowd  follow  him  through  the  streets  to  the 
door  of  his  house.  Every  one  is  filled  with  wonder. 
Nothing  is  heard  but  praises.  How  glad  are  those 
four  friends  that  they  believed  in  the  preacher's  pow- 
er, and  that  they  found  out  a  way  to  get  the  sick 


90  THE    MAN    WITH    FOUR    FRIENDS. 

What  town  is  that  by  the  side  of  the  lake? 

What  is  the  sick  man's  disease? 

Who  are  the  proud  men  ?  Some  are  Scribes,  whose  business 
it  is  to  copy  the  Scriptures  and  to  explain  them  to  the  people. 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  the  sick  man  to  comfort  him  ? 

What  does  he  say  to  cure  him? 

Why  is  he  pleased  with  the  sick  man's  friends?  Because  they 
have  faith. 

How  do  we  know  that  the  sick  man  was  a  child  of  God  ?  Be- 
cause he  wanted  to  have  his  sins  forgiven.  Many  people  do  not 
care  whether  their  sins  are  forgiven  or  not.  They  would  rather 
have  a  purse  of  gold  or  a  pretty  toy  than  have  their  sins  forgiven. 

Matt.,  ix.,  2-9.     Mark,  ii.,  1-13.     Luke,  v.,  17-27. 
THE  FIRST  WORDS  JESUS  SPOKE  TO  THE  PARALYTIC. 

u  Son,  be  of  good  cheer ;  thy  sins  be  forgiv- 
en thee." — Matt.,  ix.,  2, 


THE  POOL   OF   EETHESDA. 


LESSON  XXV. 

THE    MAN    WITHOUT   A   FRIEND. 

Close  by  a  very  large  pool  a  great  many  sick  peo- 
ple are  lying.  There  are  five  little  covered  places  by 
the  side  of  the  pool,  and  these  poor  people  are  shelter- 
ed in  them  from  the  heat  of  the  sun. 

Some  of  these  people  have  lame  feet,  and  some  have 
withered  arms,  and  some  are  quite  helpless.  It  is  te- 
dious for  them  to  lie,  hour  after  hour,  day  after  day, 
by  the  water-side ;  but  some  have  friends  sitting  near 
them,  and  they  cheer  them  by  their  company. 


92  THE    MAN    WITHOUT    A    FRIEND. 

But  there  is  one  poor  man  lying  on  a  couch,  or  bed, 
quite  helpless,  and  no  one  is  near  him.  He  seems 
rather  old,  and  he  looks  very  miserable.  Why  does 
he  he  there  so  long  ?  Does  he  mean  to  bathe  in  that 
pool  ?  But  how  could  he  bathe  without  a  friend  to 
put  him  in  ?  And  why  should  a  helpless  man  wish 
to  bathe  ? 

Hark !  what  is  that  sound  at  a  distance? 

Is  it  not  the  sound  of  the  Sabbath  psalms  sung  in 
that  building  on  the  top  of  the  hill  ? 

"  It  is  a  good  thing  to  give  thanks  unto  the  Lorc( 
....  upon  the  harp,  with  a  solemn  sound." — Ps.  xcii. 

That  poor  man  lying  by  the  pool  can  not  enter  the 
holy  courts,  for  he  has  no  one  to  take  him  there. 

Behold  a  man  walking  by  the  pool,  with  sorrowful 
looks !  He  casts  his  compassionate  eyes  on  that  help- 
less, friendless  man.  He  speaks  a  few  kind  words  to 
him. 

The  helpless  man  is  telling  him  his  pitiful  case. 

His  compassionate  Friend  listens  to  the  sad  tale, 
and  speaks  again.  And — oh,  wonderful  to  tell ! — the 
helpless  man  rises,  takes  up  his  bed  upon  his  shoul- 
ders, and  walks  away  full  of  strength  and  joy,  among 
crowds  of  people. 

Are  the  people  glad  who  see  him  walking  in  the 
street?     They  have  seen  him  lying  helpless  on  his 


THE    MAN    WITHOUT    A    FRIEND.  93 

bed  for  many  a  long  year.  What  do  they  say 
now  ? 

Alas!  there  are  some  proud  men  who  are  angry 
when  they  see  the  man  carrying  his  bed.  They  speak 
roughly  to  him ;  they  are  looking  every  where  for 
his  compassionate  Friend,  but  they  can  not  find  him. 

Where  can  he  be  ? 

See  him  standing  in  the  court  of  the  temple,  talking 
to  that  poor  man.  That  man  has  left  his  bed  at  home, 
and  has  come  to  the  temple. 

That  is  a  good  sign. 

Perhaps  the  man  feels  grateful  to  his  God,  and  sorry 
for  his  sins.  It  is  the  Friend  of  Sinners  who  is  talk- 
ing to  him,  and  he  is  giving  him  some  wise  advice. 
Will  that  poor  man  have  grace  to  follow  it  ? 

What  is  the  name  of  that  pool? 

What  does  the  word  mean?  "Beth"  means  " House,"  and  the 
whole  word  means  "House  of  Mercy." 

Why  are  those  poor  people  watching  around  the  pool? 

How  long  has  that  friendless  man  been  ill? 

Why  is  he  called  "impotent?"     Because  he  is  weak. 

What  is  the  first  question  Jesus  asks  him  ? 

What  sorrowful  complaint  does  the  poor  man  make? 

What  command  does  Jesus  give? 

Why  are  the  chief  men  angry? 

What  has  God  said  about  carrying  burdens  on  the  Sabbath-day  ? 
Jer.,  xviii.,  24. 

Ought  the  Jews  to  have  blamed  the  man  for  carrying  his  bed  ? 
No ;  for  God  has  never  forbidden  such  a  burden  to  be  carried,  but 
only  burdens  of  things  for  sale,  as  in  Neh.,  xiii.,  19.      The  same 


94  THE    MOUNTAIN    PRAYER. 

Jews  who  blamed  this  man,  encouraged  people  to  buy  and  sell  in 
the  temple,  and  that  was  really  wrong. 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  the  poor  man  in  the  temple  ? 

John,  v.,  1-16. 
THE  WORDS  OF  JESUS  TO  THE  MAN  IN  THE  TEMPLE. 

" Behold,  thou  art  made  whole;  sin  no 
more,  lest  a  worse  thing  come  unto  thee/'' — 
John,  v.,  14. 


LESSON  XXYI. 

THE    MOUNTAIN    PRAYER. 


It  is  the  dark  night. 

The  weary  laborer  is  at  rest;  the  sheep  are  asleep 
in  the  fold ;  the  little  birds  on  the  branches  are  hiding 
their  tiny  heads  beneath  their  soft  wings.  No  sound 
is  heard  among  the  mountains  except  the  shrieks  of 
the  night-hawk  or  the  howling  of  4he  wolves. 

Hark !  a  voice  is  heard  in  the  darkness. 

Behold  a  man  on  a  mountain  top  praying !  He  is 
alone. 

How  earnestly  he  prays ! 

How  long  he  continues  to  pray  ! 


THE    MOUNTAIN    PRAYER.  95 

Though,  he  looks  worn  and  weary,  he  is  not  tired 
of  praying. 

At  last  the  sun  rises. 

Who  are  those  around  him  now  ?  They  seem  to 
love  him,  and  to  delight  in  being  near  him.  He  calls 
one  of  them  to  come  to  him.  It  is  a  fisherman — a 
warm-hearted,  open,  honest  man — the  very  man  who 
let  down  the  net  so  lately,  and  made  that  prayer, 
11  Depart  from  me;  for  I  am  a  sinful  man,  0  Lord." 
Does  he  call  him  to  be  with  him?  Yes,  he  does. 
Instead  of  departing  from  him,  he  keeps  near  him. 

Then  he  calls  that  man's  brother. 

Then  he  calls  his  two  friends.  Those  two  friends 
are  brothers,  and  they  also  are  fishermen.  Those 
four  were  all  together  pulling  the  net  on  the  clay  that 
it  was  filled  with  fishes. 

He  calls  two  others,  who  are  friends,  not  broth- 
ers. 

One  of  them  he  once  found  near  Jordan,  and  said 
to  him,  " Follow  me!"  The  other  once  prayed  in  se- 
cret under  a  fig-tree. 

He  calls  another,  whom  he  once  saw  sitting  by  the 
sea-side,  receiving  taxes  or  tolls  from  the  people  who 
landed  there. 

He  calls  another.  He  is  a  man  slow  to  believe,  yet 
readv  to  die  for  his  Master's  sake. 


96  THE    MOUNTAIN    PRAYER. 

He  calls  another,  of  whom  we  know  nothing  but 
his  name. 

He  calls  two  brothers.  A  long  while  afterward 
they  wrote  two  letters  in  the  Bible. 

All  these  men  loved  Him  who  called  them. 

But  he  calls  one  who  loves  him  not — a  child  of  the 
devil,  an  enemy  of  God. 

These  twelve  men  go  down  the  mountain  with  their 
Lord,  and  they  stand  around  him  on  the  plain. 

What  a  multitude  of  people  are  collected  there ! 
They  are  waiting  for  Jesus.  They  have  come  from  a 
great  way  off.  The  blind  have  been  led,  the  lame 
have  been  carried,  the  mad  have  been  brought  by 
their  friends,  and  many  poor  sick  creatures,  without 
friends,  have  crawled  there  as  well  as  they  could. 
They  try  to  touch  the  Lord.  That  gracious  Lord 
does  not  keep  them  off;  he  lets  them  touch  him;  he 
touches  them.  The  loathsome  leper  becomes  fresh  as 
a  little  child,  and  the  helpless  cripple  skips  like  a 
young  deer.  What  songs  of  joy  are  sung  by  lips 
once  dumb ! 

When  all  the  sick  people  are  made  well,  then  the 
Lord  goes  up  into  the  mountain  again,  and  sits  down 
in  a  place  where  he  can  be  seen  and  heard  by  many 
people.  His  twelve  friends  come  to  him  there,  and  a 
great  crowd  of  people  press  round  him  to  listen.     He 


THE    MOUNTAIN    PEAYEE. 


97 


PREACHING  ON   THE  MOUNT. 


looks  at  his  twelve  friends,  and  then  opens  his  month, 
that  he  may  speak  loud,  and  begins  his  sermon.  He 
begins  it  with  a  blessing. 

Who  once  said,  " Depart  from  me?" 

What  was  his  brother's  name? 

What  were  the  names  of  the  two  brothers  who  were  fishermen 
as  well  as  they? 

To  whom  did  Jesus  once  say,  "Follow  me,"  near  the  River  Jor- 
dan ?     John,  i.,  43. 

What  was  the  name  of  that  man's  friend? 

To  whom  did  Jesus  say,  by  the  side  of  the  sea  or  lake,  "  Fol- 
low me?''     Matt.,  ix.,  9. 

Who  was  slow  to  believe,  yet  ready  to  die?  John,  xx.,  25. 
John,  xi.,  16. 

Who  were  the  two  brothers  who  wrote  two  letters  in  the 
Bible? 

Of  which  apostle  are  we  told  nothing  but  the  name  ? 

G 


98  THE    MOUNTAIN    PRAYER. 

Which  was  the  child  of  the  devil?     John,  vi.,  70. 
What  were  the  first  words  of  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount? 

Mark,  iiL,  13-19.  Luke,  vi.,  12-20. 
THE  FIRST  WORDS  OF  THE  SERMON  ON  THE  MOUNT. 

u Blessed  are  the  poor  in  spirit;  for  theirs 
is  the  kingdom  of  heaven." — Matt.,  v.,  3. 


LESSON  XXVII. 

THE    WILD    MAN. 

There  is  the  quiet  lake  among  the  green  hills. 
There  is  the  city  where  the  Preacher  lives,  whom  men 
crowd  together  to  hear.  He  is  preaching  by  the  lake. 
But  now  he  is  very  weary,  and  the  sun  is  setting. 
The  people  do  not  wish  to  leave  him,  for  they  delight 
in  hearing  him ;  but  he  tells  them  to  go ;  and  he  gets 
into  a  little  ship,  and  his  twelve  friends  come  with 
him.     Other  people  come  in  other  little  ships. 


100 


THE    WILD    MAN. 


They  set  sail.  They  are  going  across  the  lake. 
They  have  six  miles  to  go.  It  is  dark.  The  wind 
begins  to  blow  hard.  The  waters  of  the  lake  move 
up  and  down.  The  waves  are  so  high  that  they  roll 
over  the  little  ship.  See!  the  water  has  filled  the 
ship ;  it  must  soon  sink. 

"Where  is  the  Lord  ? 

His  friends  look  for  him.  They  find  him  asleep 
upon  a  cushion  in  the  hinder  part  of  the  ship.  They 
awake  him.  They  are  surprised  that  he  should  sleep 
when  they  are  so  much  terrified ;  and  the  Lord  is  sur- 
prised that  they  should  be  so  much  terrified  when  he 
is  so  near  them.     He  arises  and  speaks,  and  suddenly 


THE  LOED  KEi/UKLNG   THE    WATERS. 


THE    WILD    MAN.  101 

the  wind  goes  down,  and  the  sea  is  quiet.  Then 
every  body  in  the  ship  is  astonished.  But  the  Lord 
is  not  pleased  with  his  friends  for  their  behavior  in 
the  storm. 

Now  they  have  reached  the  land.  What  a  deso- 
late spot !  There  are  no  houses  to  be  seen  on  that 
shore ;  only  barren,  craggy  hills,  and  great  caves,  with 
stones  rolled  before  their  mouths. 

What  can  be  in  those  caves  ? 

A  scream  is  heard!  Another  scream!  A  loud, 
deep  yell !     Is  it  the  howling  of  wild  beasts  ? 

But  beasts  do  not  howl  in  the  day. 

A  wretched  man,  without  clothing,  covered  with 
wounds,  rolling  his  eyes  and  gnashing  his  teeth,  is 
wandering  among  the  rocks.  There  are  marks  on 
his  wrists  and  ankles — marks  of  chains  that  once  were 
fastened  round  his  limbs.  But  he  has  no  chains  now. 
Every  one  is  afraid  to  come  near  him.  If  any  one 
sees  him  at  a  distance,  he  runs  away,  as  he  would 
from  a  tiger. 

There  is  a  herd  of  pigs  feeding  on  the  green  mount- 
ains, with  servants  to  keep  them ;  but  those  servants 
take  care  not  to  come  near  the  wild  man. 

When  the  Lord  and  his  friends  land  among  the 
rocks  and  caves,  the  wild  man  sees  them,  and  rushes 
toward  them. 


102  THE    WILD    MAN. 

Does  the  Lord  go  back  into  his  ship  for  safety? 
No ;  he  waits  for  the  man  to  come  up  to  him.  Does 
the  man  hurt  him  ?  No ;  he  kneels  down  and  begins 
to  pray  to  him.  The  Lord  talks  with  the  man  for  a 
little  while. 

Suddenly  a  wonderful  change  is  seen. 

That  herd  of  pigs,  feeding  so  quietly  a  great  way 
off,  among  the  mountains  near  the  sea — that  herd  is 
seen  running  toward  the  edge  of  the  cliff;  the  fore- 
most falls  over  the  cliff,  and  dashes  into  the  water; 
all  the  rest  come  tumbling  over  after  it,  and  all  sink 
— sink — sink  to  the  bottom  of  those  waters. 

That  man  who  was  so  wild  is  quiet  now.  Some 
one  has  given  him  clothes  to  wear.  He  is  sitting  like 
a  lamb  at  the  Master's  feet. 

How  happy  he  looks ! 

How  much  he  seems  to  love  his  Lord ! 

But  who  are  these  coming  over  the  hills  so  fast  ? 

They  are  out  of  breath  with  running.  They  look 
frightened  and  angry.  They  come  up  to  the  Lord, 
and  speak  to  him  with  furious  looks.  They  are  point- 
ing to  the  sea,  as  though  they  wished  the  Lord  to  go. 

And  he  goes. 

He  always  goes  when  he  is  not  wanted. 

He  is  stepping  into  the  boat  with  his  friends.  That 
poor  man  is  stepping  in  after  him ;  but  Jesus  stops 
him,  and  will  not  let  him  come,  and  so  the  poor  man 


THE    WILD    MAK  103 

stays  behind  among  those  furious  people  who  are  so 
glad  to  see  the  Lord  depart 

What  lake  is  that? 

In  what  city  did  Jesus  live  ? 

What  did  the  disciples  say  to  Jesus  when  they  awoke  him? 

What  did  Jesus  reply? 

What  did  he  say  to  the  winds  and  waves? 

How  did  he  reprove  his  disciples? 

What  was  the  desolate  land  called  where  he  landed? 

What  made  the  man  so  fierce  ? 

In  what  place  did  he  wander?     Among  the  tombs. 

What  did  the  devils  in  the  man  say  to  Jesus? 

What  was  their  name  ? 

What  does  "legion"  mean?  A  legion  was  the  name  of  a  com- 
pany of  six  thousand  soldiers  in  the  Roman  army. 

What  request  did  the  devils  make  before  they  were  cast  out  ? 

Is  the  devil  in  the  bodies  of  wicked  people,  or  in  their  hearts  ? 
JEIe  is  in  their  hearts,  and  thus  he  makes  them  wicked.  Satan 
could  not  be  in  the  hearts  of  the  pigs,  for  they  have  no  under- 
standing; he  was  in  their  bodies,  as  he  had  been  in  the  body  of 
the  wild  man.  In  the  Lord's  prayer  we  pray  against  Satan  when 
we  say,  "Deliver  us  from  evil" — that  is,  from  the  evil  One. 

Why  did  those  people  from  the  town  wish  Jesus  to  go  away? 

Who  had  told  them  what  Jesus  had  done? 

Why  did  Jesus  not  let  the  poor  man  go  with  him  in  the  ship  ? 

Matt.,  viii.,  18,  to  end.      Mark,  iv.,  34,  to  end ;  v.,  1-21. 
Luke,  viii.,  22-40. 

THE    WORDS    OF   JESUS    TO    THE    POOR    GADARENE, 
OR    GERGESENE. 

"  Go  home  to  thy  friends,  and  tell  them  how 
great  things  the  Lord  hath  done  for  thee,  and 
hath  had  compassion  on  thee." — Mark,  v.,  19. 


CASTLE  OF  MACHEEUS. 


LESSON  XXVIIL 


THE    PRISON. 

How  strong  is  that  castle,  with  its  great  gates,  thick 
walls,  and  high  towers ! 

All  around  are  high  mountains  and  dark  forests, 
and  not  far  off  there  is  a  great  lake ;  not  that  fair  and 
smiling  lake  where  fishermen  cast  their  nets,  but  a 
gloomy  lake,  where  no  fishes  are  swimming,  and  where 
no  ships  are  sailing.  It  is  a  horrible  lake,  full  of  bit- 
ter waters. 


THE    PRISON.  105 

Who  would  like  to  live  in  a  castle  near  such  a  hor- 
rible lake? 

Yet  a  king  is  living  there  for  a  little  while.  There 
are  soldiers  going  in  and  out.  They  seem  to  be  pre- 
paring for  war.  But  there  is  no  fighting  to-day; 
there  is  feasting. 

In  one  of  the  rooms  of  the  castle  a  fine  feast  is 
spread,  and  the  king  is  sitting  at  the  table  among  his 
lords,  all  clad  in  purple  and  fine  linen. 

While  the  company  are  eating  and  drinking,  and 
making  merry,  a  little  girl  enters  the  hall.  She  looks 
like  a  princess,  and  she  seems  full  of  vanity  and  folly. 
She  begins  to  dance  before  those  great  lords.  Can  a 
little  maid  of  ten  years  old  be  so  bold  as  to  dance  in 
such  company  ?  Yet  the  king  views  her  with  delight, 
and  so  do  all  his  lords.  They  must  be  bad  men  to  be 
pleased  with  so  vain  a  girl. 

When  she  has  finished  her  dance  the  king  speaks 
to  her.  He  is  praising  her,  and  making  her  promises. 
The  child  leaves  the  room,  but  soon  comes  back  with 
a  message. 

The  king  is  much  troubled  when  he  hears  that 
message. 

He  looks  at  his  lords,  and  then  at  the  little  maiden, 
and  seems  perplexed  and  troubled.  At  last  he  calls 
to  one  of  the  soldiers  of  his  guard,  and  gives  him  a 


106  THE    PRISON. 

command.  The  man  goes  down  to  the  bottom  of  the 
castle;  he  unbolts  a  door;  he  enters  a  gloomy  dun- 
geon. There  sits  a  man  in  chains.  His  feet  are 
bound  with  fetters.  He  is  young  and  strong,  but  his 
face  is  thin  and  pale,  like  the  face,  of  one  who  has 
been  shut  up  in  prison  month  after  month. 

He  does  not  seem  alarmed  when  he  sees  the  soldier 
with  a  sword  drawn  in  his  hand.  He  meekly  bends 
his  neck,  and  suffers  the  soldier  to  cut  off  his  head. 
The  soldier  puts  the  bleeding  head  into  a  great  dish, 
and  delivers  it  up  to  (you  will  shudder  to  hear  it !) 
the  little  girl. 

Can  she  bear  the  sight  of  that  face  bathed  in  blood  ? 

Yes,  sne  can.  She  hastens  with  the  dish  to  a  fine 
room  in  the  castle,  where  a  very  grand  lady  is  sitting. 

How  dreadful  is  the  countenance  of  that  beautiful 
princess!  The  malice  and  cruelty  of  Satan  beam 
from  her  bright  eyes.  She  takes  the  dish  from  the 
hands  of  the  little  girl  with  a  tiger's  joy. 

Some  good  men  come  soon  to  the  prison,  weeping 
very  much,  and  they  take  the  body.  Oh,  how  they 
weep  to  see  the  bleeding  neck !  And  they  bury  it  in 
a  tomb,  and  then  go  to  Jesus  and  tell  him  what  has 
happened. 

What  castle  is  that?  It  is  the  castle  of  Macherus,  near  the 
Dead  Sea,  in  the  country  of  Moab,  beyond  Jordan. 


THE    PRISON.  107 

Who  is  that  king?  It  is  Herod.  Not  the  Herod  who  killed 
the  babes  of  Bethlehem,  for  he  died  soon  afterward ;  but  it  is  his 
son,  called  Herod  Antipas. 

Of  what  country  is  he  king?     He  is  king  of  Galilee. 

Is  he  really  a  king  ?  Not  really  ;  he  is  only  a  tetrarch,  or  gov- 
ernor of  a  fourth  part  of  a  kingdom.  See  Luke,  iii.,  1.  But  he 
is  called  a  king. 

Does  he  live  in  that  castle?  No,  he  lives  in  Tiberias,  a  fine 
city  he  built  on  the  Lake  of  Gennesareth,  but  he  is  stopping  at 
this  castle  on  his  way  to  fight  with  an  Arabian  king  named  Aretas. 

Why  does  he  make  a  feast?     Because  it  is  his  birth-day. 

Who  is  that  little  girl?  Salome.  She  is  not  Herod's  daugh- 
ter, but  the  daughter  of  his  wife. 

Who  is  the  little  girl's  mother?  A  very  wicked  woman  named 
Herodias.  She  has  been  the  wife  of  Herod's  brother,  but  she  has 
left  her  husband  and  married  Herod. 

Who  is  the  prisoner? 

Why  was  he  put  in  prison? 

Why  did  Salome  ask  for  his  head? 

Who  buried  John  the  Baptist? 

Where  was  he  buried?  It  must  have  been  somewhere  near  the 
castle,  not  far  from  the  banks  of  the  River  Jordan.  So  John  was 
buried  near  the  placs  where  he  baptized,  and  there  he  will  rise 
again  to  reign  with  Jesus. 

Matt.,  xiv.,  1-13.     Mark,  vi.,  14-30.     Luke,  ix.,  7-9. 
THE    BLESSEDNESS    OF   THE    MARTYRS. 

"  I  saw  the  souls  of  them  that  were  behead- 
ed for  the  witness  of  Jesus,  and  for  the  word 
of  God;  and  they  lived  and  reigned  with 
Christ  a  thousand  years." — Rev.,  xx.,  4f 


108  THE    GUILTY    KING. 


LESSON  XXIX. 

THE    GUILTY    KING. 

On  the  banks  of  the  beautiful  lake  where  so  many 
little  ships  are  sailing,  there  is  a  grand  town.  It  is 
full  of  fine  new  houses,  built  of  stone.  One  of  them 
is  a  splendid  palace.  There  lives  a  king.  It  is  the 
very  same  who  made  a  feast  to  his  lords  in  the  castle 
by  the  Dead  Sea.  He  was  then  going  to  the  wars. 
He  is  now  come  back  from  the  wars  (though  he  has 
not  conquered  his  enemies). 

His  servants  are  standing  near  him,  talking.  They 
are  telling  him  some  wonderful  news.  The  king  is 
listening  with  great  attention. 

He  looks  terrified.     He  looks  miserable. 

He  looks  as  if  he  remembered  some  wicked  thing 
that  he  has  done.  He  trembles.  Though  he  is  a 
king,  he  trembles ;  for  there  is  a  King  of  kings,  and 
he  is  afraid  of  His  anger. 

Why  does  he  not  pray  for  pardon?  No,  he  does 
not  pray.  He  only  trembles.  He  does  not  confess 
his  sins.     He  will  grow  harder  and  harder ;  and  soon 


THE    GUILTY    KING.  109 

he  will  leave  off  trembling,  and  only  laugh  at  his 
sins. 

What  lake  is  that?  The  Lake  of  Gennesareth,  called  also  the 
Sea  of  Galilee. 

What  is  that  grand  new  town  on  its  shores?  It  is  the  town 
of  Tiberias  that  Herod  built,  and  called  after  the  Emperor  Tibe- 
rius Caesar,  of  Eome. 

What  wonderful  news  are  the  servants  telling  Herod? 

Why  did  Herod  wish  to  see  Jesus?  That  he  might  know 
whether  he  was  like  John  the  Baptist. 

Did  he  ever  see  him  ?  Yes,  a  long  while  afterward,  and  then  he 
was  grown  so  bold  that  he  mocked  him.     Luke,  xxiii.,  6-11. 

Matt.,  xiv.,  1,  2.     Mark,  vi.,  14-16.     Luke,  ix.,  7-9. 
THE  WORDS  OF  HEROD  WHEN  HE  HEARD  OF  CHRIST. 

"It  is  John,  whom  I  beheaded;  he  is  risen 
from  the  dead." — Mark,  vi.,  16. 


JESUS  PREACHING  NEAR  THE  LAKE. 


LESSON  XXX. 


THE    SUPPER    BY   THE    LAKE. 

There  are  many  cities  built  by  the  side  of  the 
lake.  There  is  that  grand  city  where  the  king  lives. 
There  is  another  city,  where  a  greater  King  lives,  not 
in  a  palace,  but  in  a  cottage,  wearing  the  garments  of 
a  poor  man. 

His  twelve  friends  are  coming  back  to  that  house. 
They  come  back,  not  all  together,  but  two  at  a  time, 
each  carrying  a  staff  in  his  hand,  but  no  bag.     They 


THE    SUPPER    BY    THE    LAKE.  Ill 

seem  to  have  been  traveling  a  long  way,  and  they 
look  as  if  their  journeys  had  been  pleasant.  They 
are  much  delighted  to  see  their  dear  Master  again,  and 
they  long  to  tell  him  all  that  has  happened.  They 
sit  round  him,  and  begin  to  tell  him ;  but  people  come 
into  the  house  and  disturb-  them.  They  can  not  even 
eat  their  suppers  in  quiet,  for  many  want  to  talk  with 
their  Master. 

See  those  twelve  men  following  the  Master  out  of 
the  house  to  the  water's  edge !  They  all  get  into  a 
little  ship  early  in  the  morning.  They  go  very  quiet- 
ly, that  no  one  may  see  them  go,  for  they  want  to  be 
alone  with  their  Master.     They  sail  on  the  lake. 

They  do  not  go  across  the  lake,  but  they  sail  along 
the  coast  to  a  place  about  ten  miles  distant.  They 
might  have  walked  along  the  shore,  but  they  preferred 
going  by  water. 

At  last  they  come  to  the  place  where  they  wish  to 
land.  It  is  a  lonely  place,  where  there  is  no  town, 
but  only  scattered  huts  among  the  high  green  hills. 
Here  they  may  talk  without  being  disturbed. 

But  there  is  a  crowd  of  people  on  the  shore.  They 
are  all  waiting  for  the  Lord.  They  saw  him  get  into 
the  little  ship,  and  so  they  walked  along  the  shore 
so  quickly  that  they  got  first  to  this  place.  As  they 
walked  they  could  see  his  little  ship  on  the  sea;  and 


112  THE    SUPPER    BY    THE    LAKE. 

they  saw  it  stop,  and  they  came  to  the  water's  edge 
just  as  Jesus  was  stepping  out. 

The  twelve  disciples  are  surprised  to  see  such  a 
crowd,  but  Jesus  is  not;  for  he  knew  all  they  were 
doing,  because  he  is  God.  How  kindly  he  looks  on 
them !  How  much  he  pities  them  because  they  have 
no  one  to  teach  them ! 

He  sits  upon  a  hill,  and  teaches  them.  He  sees 
some  poor  creatures  among  them,  blind,  lame,  and 
sick,  and  he  heals  every  one  of  them. 

Thus  he  spends  the  day. 

But  now  the  sun  is  going  to  set.  The  poor  people 
have  had  bread  for  their  souls,  but  no  bread  for  their 
bodies.  They  will  not  have  strength  to  walk  ten 
miles  to  their  homes. 

Jesus  is  talking  with  his  twelve  friends.  Those 
friends  seem  to  wonder  at  what  their  Master  is  saying. 
But  one  of  them  is  now  speaking  to  a  boy  among  the 
crowd.  That  boy  has  got  a  store  of  food.  Perhaps 
he  has  brought  it  from  a  village  near,  in  the  hopes  of 
selling  it.  There  are  five  loaves  and  two  small  fishes. 
One  of  the  disciples  is  taking  them  from  the  boy  and 
bringing  them  to  Jesus.  Now  all  the  twelve  are 
going  among  the  people,  and  making  them  sit  on  the 
grass  in  rows,  fifty  in  a  row.  What  a  number  of 
rows!     There  are  a  hundred  rows  of  fifty  in  each. 


THE    SUPPER    BY    THE    LAKE.  113 

The  grass  is  fresh  and  green,  for  it  is  the  first  month 
of  spring. 

Now  the  Lord  is  breaking  the  bread,  and  lifting  up 
his  eyes  to  heaven,  and  speaking  to  his  Father. 

See,  now  he  is  giving  a  portion  of  bread  and  fish 
to  each  of  the  twelve. 

What  a  little  portion  each  has  got !  not  more  than 
enough  for  two  or  three  persons  to  eat. 

Now  the  twelve  are  walking  among  the  rows  of 
men,  giving  to  each  person  as  much  bread  and  fish  as 
he  can  eat ;  and  there  is  more  than  enough  for  every 
one.  There  are  a  few  women  and  children  sitting  on 
the  grass,  not  counted  among  the  rows ;  yet  each  has 
a  portion  of  food. 

How  happy  the  people  look  as  they  are  eating  their 
supper !  They  did  not  expect  to  be  fed  in  that  lone- 
ly place.  Now  they  will  have  strength  to  go  home 
that  night. 

Each  of  the  twelve  has  got  a  basket,  and  is  looking 
in  the  grass  for  small  pieces  of  bread  which  the  people 
have  left.  Soon  every  one  of  the  baskets  is  filled 
with  these  little  bits.  Now  it  is  certain  that  every 
one  has  had  enough  food,  or  else  so  much  would  not 
have  been  left. 

How  astonished  all  the  people  seem  that  evening ! 
They  are  all  looking  at  Jesus  and  praising  him. 

H 


114  THE    WALK    ON    THE    WATERS. 

What  town  did  Jesus  leave  when  he  went  into  the  ship?    Ca- 
pernaum. 

To  what  place  did  he  go  ?     To  a  place  not  far  from  Bethsaida. 
What  did  Jesus  consult  his  disciples  about  in  the  evening  ? 
Which  of  them  told  him  of  the  lad? 
How  many  men  did  Jesus  feed  ? 

Matt.,  xiv.,  13-22.   Mark,  vi.,  30-44.    Luke,  ix.,  10-18. 
John,  vi.,  1-15. 

THE    WORDS     OF     THE     MEN    WHO     HAD     SEEN    THE 
MIRACLE. 

"  This  is  of  a  truth  that  Prophet  that  should 
come  into  the  world." — John,  vi.,  14. 


LESSON  XXXI. 

THE   WALK   ON    THE    WATERS. 

Twelve  men  are  getting  into  a  little  ship. 

They  do  not  wish  to  get  in,  for  their  Master  will 
not  go  with  them,  and  they  wish  to  stay  with  him. 
But  they  will  not  refuse  to  do  what  their  Master 
wishes,  so  they  all  set  sail,  and  leave  their  dear  Mas- 
ter standing '  on  the  shore  amid  a  great  crowd  of 
people. 

These  people  seem  so  glad  that  the  Master  is  not 


THE    WALK    ON    THE    WATERS.  115 

gone,  for  it  is  lie  who  lias  just  fed  them  with  bread 
and  fish. 

Now  the  Master  is  persuading  the  people  to  go 
away. 

The  people  are  going  away ;  but  they  are  not  all 
going  home,  for  they  hope  to  find  the  Lord  in  that 
same  place  when  the  morning  comes.  Where  they 
will  sleep  to-night  I  can  not  tell,  perhaps  in  the  vil- 
lages, perhaps  in  sheltered  nooks  among  the  hills. 

Now  the  blessed  Lord  is  standing  all  alone.  He 
seems  to  wish  to  be  alone.  He  goes  toward  one  of 
the  high  hills;  he  climbs  its  side  as  the  darkness  of 
night  is  coming  on ;  now  he  is  out  of  the  sight  of 
men,  and  he  is  pouring  forth  his  earnest  prayers  to 
his  Father  in  Heaven.  He  continues  to  pray  until 
the  very  darkest  hour  of  the  whole  night ;  then  he 
looks,  and  sees  in  the  midst  of  the  lake  a  little  ship 
tossed  with  the  waves.  None  but  Jesus  could  see 
that  little  ship  in  that  dark  hour;  but  the  darkness 
and  the  light  are  both  alike  to  him. 

The  poor  disciples  are  rowing  with  all  their  might, 
for  sails  are  of  no  use  now  the  wind  is  against  them 
and  blowing  with  such  fury. 

How  much  the  Saviour  on  the  mountain's  top  feels 
for  the  poor  disciples  on  the  rough  lake ! 

Suddenly  the  weary  rowers  cry  out  in  terror.    They 


116      THE  WALK  ON  THE  WATERS. 

see  something  that  looks  like  a  man,  but  they  think 
it  can  not  be  a  man,  with  a  body  like  their  own,  be- 
cause he  is  walking  upon  the  water.  They  think  it 
must  be  the  spirit  of  a  dead  man,  with  the  likeness  of 
a  body,  but  not  a  real  one. 


JESUS   WALKING   OIS    THE   WAVES. 


He  is  coming  nearer  the  ship,  but  it  seems  as  if  he 
would  pass  by  without  stopping.  He  hears  the  bitter 
cry  of  the  frightened  rowers ;~  he  stops ;  he  speaks. 
His  voice  is  loud  enough,  to  be  heard  amid  the  howl- 
ing winds  and  roaring  waves. 

And  what  comfort  does  that  voice  give  to  the  ter- 
rified men ! 

One  of  them  answers,  and  then  steps  overboard  into 


THE    WALK    OIST    THE    WATERS.  117 

that  raging  sea.  He  walks  upon  those  tossing  waves ! 
He  is  going  toward  his  friend ;  he  is  just  within  reach 
of  him,  when — suddenly  he  looks  frightened — he  be- 
gins to  sink ;  he  calls  out  j  his  friend  stretches  out  his 
hand  and  takes  hold  of  him,  and  leads  him  toward  the 
ship,  and  goes  up  with  him  into  the  vessel. 

Oh,  how  joyfully  do  those  eleven  men  receive  him 
on  board !  They  come  round  him  and  worship  him 
as  the  Son  of  God. 

Immediately  the  wind  ceases,  and  the  ship  very- 
soon  reaches  the  land,  and  conveys  the  men  to  their 
own  city  and  their  own  home. 

From  what  place  did  the  ship  go  with  the  twelve  disciples  on 
board?     From  the  desert  of  Bethsaida.* 

To  what  place  was  the  ship  going?  To  Capernaum,  whence 
it  had  come  in  the  morning. 

How  far  did  Jesus  walk  upon  the  sea  before  he  reached  the 
ship  ?     Three  or  four  miles,  which  was  nearly  half  the  way. 

What  words  did  Jesus  speak  to  comfort  his  disciples  as  he  came 
near  the  ship? 

Who  asked  leave  to  come  to  him  on  the  water? 

What  did  he  cry  out  when  he  was  sinking? 

What  did  Jesus  say  as  he  caught  hold  of  him? 

What  did  the  disciples  say  as  they  worshiped  Jesus? 

Matt.,  xiv.,  24-34.    Mark,  vi.,  47-53.    John,  vi.,  16-22. 

*  In  Mark,  vi.,  45,  instead  of  reading  "unto  Bethsaida,"  we  must 
read  (as  in  the  margin)  over  against  Bethsaida;  or,  to  Capernaum, 
which  is  over  against  Bethsaida. 


118  THE    SELFISH    MULTITUDE. 

THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    TO    THE    DISCIPLES    IN    THE 

STORM. 

"Be  of  good  cheer;  it  is  I,  be  not  afraid." 
—Mark,  vi.,  51. 


LESSON  XXXII. 

THE    SELFISH    MULTITUDE. 

It  is  morning  among  the  green  hills  by  the  sea-side. 
The  green  grass  looks  as  if  it  had  been  trodden  by 
many  feet,  and  as  if  a  multitude  had  been  sitting  on 
it  the  day  before. 

This  morning  a  number  of  people  are  looking  for 
some  one  they  can  not  find.  They  go  from  place  to 
place ;  but  he  is  not  here,  he  is  not  there.  They  look 
much  disappointed ;  they  talk  to  each  other  and  won- 
der. They  seem  to  be  in  great  haste  to  go  somewhere. 
Shall  they  walk  all  the  way,  or  shall  they  go  by  sea? 
But  are  there  any  ships  for  them  to  go  in?  Yes, 
some  have  just  arrived. 

The  people  get  into  these  ships  and  set  sail.  How 
crowded  the  vessels  are!  But  no  storm  arises,  and 
the  people  get  safely  to  a  city  on  the  shore.     They 


THE    SELFISH    MULTITUDE.  119 

land ;  they  look,  they  search,  and  lo !  they  find  Him 
whom  they  sought. 

How  much  surprised  they  seem ! 

They  can  not  think  how  he  got  over. 

No ;  there  were  no  other  ships  the  evening  before 
except  that  one  into  which  the  disciples  entered. 
How  little  these  people  think  that  Jesus  walked  upon 
the  sea ! 

Is  Jesus  pleased  to  see  them  ? 

No ;  he  seems  displeased. 

He  goes  into  the  synagogue  and  teaches.  Many 
of  the  chief  men  there  dispute  with  him. 

Jesus  speaks  about  himself  and  his  Father,  while 
wicked  men  around  are  scoffing  at  his  words.  Some, 
who  liked  him  once,  are  beginning  to  look  angry. 
They  go  away.  It  seems  as  if  they  never  mean  to 
come  back,  or  to  see  him  again.  Poor  creatures! 
what  will  they  do  without  Jesus?  He  can  do  with- 
out them,  but  they  can  not  do  without  Htm. 

Jesus  looks  round  on  his  twelve  friends  and  asks 
them  a  question.  One  of  them  answers  very  affection- 
'ately.  They  all  love  their  Master  except  one,  who 
only  pretends  to  love  Him. 

"Why  did  the  people  expect  to  find  Jesus  in  the  morning  ?  Be- 
cause they  had  seen  the  disciples  go  away  in  the  only  ship,  and 
therefore  they  thought  Jesus  must  still  be  in  the  place. 


120  THE    SELFISH    MULTITUDE. 

To  what  city  did  the  people  go  in  the  ships  that  came  after- 
ward ?     To  Capernaum. 

Why  were  they  so  anxious  to  find  Jesus? 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  them  when  they  came? 

What  did  he  say  about  himself  in  the  synagogue?  "I  came 
down  from  Heaven.  I  am  the  bread  of  life.  The  bread  that  I 
will  give  is  my  flesh.      My  flesh  is  meat  indeed." 

What  did  the  scoffing  Jews  say?  They  said,  "Do  we  not  know 
his  father  and  mother  ?  Why,  then,  does  he  say  he  came  down 
from  Heaven?     How  can  he  give  us  his  flesh  to  eat?" 

What  question  did  Jesus  ask  his  twelve  disciples?  "Will  ye 
also  go  away  ?" 

Who  answered  the  question? 

What  did  he  say? 

What  did  Jesus  say  of  the  disciple  who  pretended  to  love  him  ? 

John,  vi.,  22,  to  end. 

peter's  answer  to  jesus. 
" Lord,  to  whom  shall  we  go?   thou  hast 
the  words  of  eternal  life,  and  we  believe  and 
are  sure  that  thou  art  that  Christ,  the  Son  of 
the  living  God.17— John,  vi.,  68,  69. 


THE  MOUNT   OF   TRANSFIGURATION. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

THE    MOUNTAIN    OF    GLORY. 

On  a  high  mountain,  in  the  night,  there  is  a  man 
shining  as  bright  as  the  sun.  That  glorious  man  is 
praying  in  the  darkness;  and  as  he  prays  his  face 


122 


THE    MOUNTAIN    OF    GLORY. 


grows  brighter  and  brighter,  till  it  is  bright  as  the 
sun,  and  even  his  clothes  shine  like  the  light,  and 
look  exceedingly  white,  like  snow. 

And  now  two  glorious  men  are  talking  with  him. 
They  are  bright  like  angels,  but  not  as  bright  as  that 
glorious  man  in  the  midst.  They  seem  to  be  talking 
of  something  sorrowful,  yet  of  something  that  will 
end  in  joy.     "What  can  it  be  ? 

Three  poor  men  are  sleeping  upon  that  mountain 
top,  just  near  the  three  bright  ones. 

Suddenly  the  sleepers  awake. 

How  much  astonished  they  are  at  the  sight  of  the 
glorious  three !     And  how  much  frightened,  too ! 


THE  TRANSFIGURATION. 


THE    MOUNTAIN    OF    GLORY.  123 

But  now  two  of  these  bright  ones  seem  as  if  they 
were  going  back  to  heaven.  These  poor  men  do  not 
wish  them  to  go  away ;  for,  though  afraid,  they  are 
delighted  with  all  they  see  and  hear.  They  never 
saw  any  thing  so  beautiful,  or  heard  any  thing  so 
sweet  before. 

One  of  these  poor  men  speaks  to  the  Lord.  He 
seems  to  be  asking  him  not  to  let  those  bright  ones 
go  away. 

Lo !  a  great  cloud  hides  those  glorious  three  from 
the-  sight  of  the  poor  men.  It  is  not  a  dark  cloud, 
but  a  bright  cloud;  yet  it  fills  them  with  fear.  A 
sound  comes  out  of  the  cloud.  It  is  a  voice,  not  like 
any  voice  heard  upon  earth.  Now  the  poor  men  fall 
down  upon  their  faces,  and  lie  stretched  upon  the 
ground. 

Pfesently  a  gentle  hand  touches  them,  a  gentle 
voice  speaks  to  them ;  they  look  up ;  it  is  their  Friend, 
no  longer  bright  as  the  sun,  but  as  he  ever  used  to 
look — a  poor  man  like  themselves,  with  a  sorrowful 
countenance.  They  look  around,  hoping  to  see  the 
bright  ones ;  but  they  are  gone ;  the  cloud  is  gone ; 
Jesus  alone  is  there. 

It  is  morning  now.  The  poor  men  walk  down  the 
mountain  talking  with  the  Friend  they  love.  Will 
they  ever  forget  how  glorious  he  looked  that  night  ? 


124  THE    MISERABLE    YOUTH. 

What  mountain  is  that?  A  mountain  in  Galilee.  We  know 
not  which.  Most  people  call  it  Mount  Tabor,  but  others  say  it 
could  not  be  Mount  Tabor,  as  there  were  towers  and  walls  built 
there  in  our  Saviour's  time,  though  there  are  none  there  now. 

Who  are  those  two  bright  men  come  down  from  heaven? 

Who  are  those  three  poor  men?  m 

Which  of  them  spoke  to  Jesus? 

What  did  he  say? 

What  is  a  tabernacle?     A  tent. 

Whose  voice  came  out  of  the  cloud? 

What  words  did  He  speak? 

What  did  Jesus  say  when  he  touched  his  disciples? 

Matt.,  xvii.,  1-14.     Mark,  ix.,  2-14.     Luke,  ix.,  28-37. 
THE    WORDS    OF    PETER   TO    JESUS    ON    THE    MOUNT. 

" Master,  it  is  good  for  us  to  be  here;  and 
let  us  make  three  tabernacles ;  one  for  thee, 
and  one  for  Moses,  and  one  for  Elias." — Luke, 
ix.,  33. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 

THE   MISERABLE   YOUTH. 

It  is  morning.  Many  people  are  standing  at  the 
foot  of  a  mountain.  There  is  a  great  deal  of  confusion 
among  them.  Some  are  saying  one  thing,  and  some 
another. 


THE    MISERABLE    YOUTH.  125 

Nine  poor  men  are  standing  in  the  midst  of  the 
crowd.     They  look  troubled  and  perplexed. 

Some  proud  learned  men  are  talking  to  those  nine 
men,  and  scoffing  and  jeering  at  them.  How  much 
ashamed  those  nine  appear  to  be ! 

Every  one  is  looking  at  a  miserable  boy,  who  is 
twisting  and  turning,  rolling  his  eyes,  and  gnashing 
his  teeth,  tossing  his  arms,  and  foaming  at  his  mouth, 
and  screaming  and  howling  like  a  wild  beast.  People 
hold  him  fast,  or  he  would  do  a  great  deal  of  harm, 
and  perhaps  kill  himself.  The  boy  can  not  speak  a 
word,  nor  can  he  hear  what  is  said  to  him. 

There  is  a  man  close  by  him  who  looks  very  un- 
happy.    He  must  be  the  father  of  the  boy. 

Suddenly  the  people  begin  to  run  toward  the 
mountain.  They  are  running  to  meet  a  gracious 
man  who  is  coming  down  that  mountain,  accompa- 
nied by  three  friends.  The  people  seem  delighted  to 
see  him. 

That  man  comes  to  the  spot  where  the  proud  men 
are  standing,  and  he  speaks  to  them. 

But  before  they  can  answer  the  father  rushes  for- 
ward, kneels  at  the  feet  of  the  gracious  man,  and  tells 
him  all  his  trouble. 

That  kind  Friend  listens  with  great  compassion,  and 
then  speaks  as  if  he  were  displeased  and  surprised. 


126  THE    MISERABLE    YOUTH. 

He  gives  a  command. 

The  boy  is  coming.  But  as  he  is  coming  he  is 
thrown  down  upon  the  ground,  and  he  lies  there 
wallowing  and  foaming  like  a  poor  wounded  beast. 

How  sorrowful  the  father  looks !  But  he  hears  his 
gracious  Friend  speaking  encouraging  words;  and 
now  the  tears  are  streaming  down  his  cheeks,  and  he 
is  making  a  short  and  earnest  prayer  to  his  loving 
Lord. 

Every  moment  the  crowd  is  increasing,  for  people 
are  running  to  see  what  is  going  on. 

The  word  is  spoken ;  a  horrible  cry  is  heard ;  a  ter- 
rible struggle  is  seen;  the  boy  lies  still  as  a  stone 
upon  the  ground.     He  seems  to  be  dead. 

The  gracious  Lord  stoops  down,  takes  the  helpless 
boy  by  the  hand,  lifts  him  up,  and  gives  him  into  his 
father's  arms. 

"What  a  change!  That  restless,  struggling,  sense- 
less boy  is  now  quiet,  and  well,  and  reasonable. 

How  much  astonished  every  one  is  who  sees  this 
wonder ! 

At  last  Jesus  returns  to  his  house,  and  the  nine 
disciples  come  and  ask  him  a  question  which  they 
did  not  like  to  ask  before  the  people.  Their  Mas- 
ter answers  them,  and  tells  them  what  they  have 
done  wrong. 


THE    COLLECTORS    OF    MONEY.  127 

What  is  the  matter  with  that  boy? 
Who  are  those  proud  men? 
Who  are  those  nine  men? 
What  are  their  names? 
Why  are  they  ashamed? 

Where  had  Jesus  been  while  they  were  trying  to  cure  the  boy? 
What  words  did  the  father  say  with  tears  ? 
What  did  Jesus  say  to  the  devil? 
Why  did  not  the  devil  speak  to  Jesus? 

What  question  did  the  nine  disciples  ask  Jesus  in  the  house  ? 
What  did  Jesus  answer? 

Are  some  devils  worse  than  others?    Yes,  and  this  dumb  devil 
was  one  of  the  worst  kind. 

Matt.,  xvii.,  14-22.  Mark,  ix.,  14-30.  Luke,  ix.,  37-43. 
THE  WORDS  OF  THE  FATHER  TO  JESUS. 

"Lord,  I  believe;    help  thou  mine  unbe- 
lief."—Mark,  ix.,  24. 


LESSON  XXXV. 

THE    COLLECTORS    OF    MONET. 

A  fisherman  is  standing  near  the  door  of  a  house. 
That  house  is  in  a  town  near  the  sweet  lake  where 
Jesus  so  often  sailed.  It  is  not  a  grand  town.  The 
houses  are  small,  and  have  flat  roofs.  They  are  built 
of  stone.     They  have  deep  verandas  in  front,  so  that 


128  THE    COLLECTORS    OF    MONEY. 

when  a  man  stands  by  his  door  he  is  shaded  from  the 
sun. 

Some  men  pass  by  the  house.  They  have  a  bag  to 
hold  money.  They  speak  to  the  man  at  the  door. 
He  answers ;  but,  instead  of  giving  them  any  money, 
he  goes  into  the  house. 

Is  he  gone  to  fetch  his  money  ? 

No,  for  he  comes  out  without  any  money,  but  only 
a  fish-hook  in  his  hand.  He  goes  to  the  side  of  the 
lake  and  casts  in  the  hook.  Of  course  he  first  puts  a 
bait  on  the  hook. 

Presently  he  catches  a  fish.  He  pulls  it  out  of  the 
water.  He  opens  the  creature's  mouth,  and  finds  in 
it  a  piece  of  silver,  of  the  value  of  half  a  crown. 

He  takes  the  money  to  the  collectors,  and  gives  it 
to  them. 

Who  is  that  poor  man  standing  near  his  house? 

In  what  town  is  the  house? 

What  are  those  men  collecting  money  for?  For  the  temple, 
to  buy  sacrifices,  and  to  pay  other  expenses  of  the  holy  place. 

Are  those  collectors  publicans?  No,  for  publicans  collected  the 
public  taxes  for  the  Emperor  of  Eome,  while  these  men  collected 
for  the  temple  of  God. 

Who  is  that  poor  man  at  the  door? 

What  question  do  those  collectors  ask  him? 

What  does  he  reply? 

Whom  does  Peter  talk  with  when  he  goes  into  the  house? 

What  is  the  meaning  of  "  Jesus  prevented  him?"  It  does  not 
mean  Jesus  hindered  him,  but,  Jesus  spoke  before  Peter  could  ask 
him  any  question. 


THE    COLLECTORS    OF    MONEY.  129 

How  was  it  that  Jesus  was  in  Peter's  house?  Because  Jesus 
lodged  there. 

Why  might  Jesus  have  refused  to  pay  money  to  the  collectors? 
Because  the  money  was  for  his  Father's  house,  and  children  do 
not  pay  money  to  their  own  fathers  when  their  fathers  are  rich. 

What  command  did  Jesus  give  to  Peter  ? 

How  much  money  did  Peter  want  in  order  to  pay  the  collect- 
ors? Fifteen  pence;  and  Jesus  wanted  fifteen  pence,  so  that  half 
a  crown  was  enough  to  pay  for  both. 

Was  Jesus  rich  or  poor  when  he  was  on  earth?  He  was  a 
very  poor  man,  for  he  had  nothing  of  his  own ;  yet  he  was  very 
rich,  for  he  was  God,  and  all  things  belonged  to  him,  even  all  the 
cattle  on  the  hills,  and  all  the  fishes  in  the  sea. 

Matt.,  xvii.,  24,  to  end. 
THE    GREAT    KINDNESS    OF    JESUS. 

uYe  know  the  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,  that,  though  he  was  rich,  yet  for  your 
sakes  he  became  poor." — 2  Cor.,  viii.,  9. 


JEBU8  AT  BETHANY. 


LESSON  XXXVI. 

THE    BUSY   WOMAN. 

Theee  is  a  very  fruitful  hill,  with  a  pretty  village 
built  on  the  hill  side,  among  palm  and  olive  trees.  It 
is  very  near  a  great  city,  with  a  splendid  building  in 
the  midst. 

In  that  town  a  guest  is  resting  himself.  At  his  feet 
a  woman  is  sitting,  and  listening  to  every  word  he 
says.  She  looks  as  if  she  would  not  like  to  lose  a  sin- 
gle word  that  drops  from  his  lips.  Her  countenance 
is  meek  and  affectionate. 


THE    BUSY    WOMAN.  133 

Suddenly  another  woman  comes  near.  She  seems 
in  great  haste  and  confusion,  and  as  if  she  had  too 
much  to  do,  and  did  not  know  how  to  get  through 
her  work. 

She  looks  angry  as  well  as  busy.  She  does  not 
mind  disturbing  her  guest  while  he  is  talking.  She 
speaks  to  him  in  a  hasty  manner.  She  seems  to  be 
angry  with  the  woman  who  is  sitting  at  his  feet.  She 
seems  to  be  speaking  against  her. 

That  gentle  maiden  does  not  answer. 

Her  gracious  Friend  answers  for  her.  He  looks 
displeased  with  the  woman  who  spoke  so  angrily. 

Does  she  look  ashamed  ? 

I  think  she  must  feel  ashamed,  for  she  has  behaved 
improperly  and  unkindly. 

What  village  is  that  ?  Bethany.  It  is  called  Bethany  because 
there  are  so  many  dates  on  the  palm-trees  there.  "Bethany" 
signifies  "House  of  Dates." 

On  what  hill  is  Bethany  built?     On  the  Mount  of  Olives. 

Near  what  city  is  that  mount  ?     Jerusalem. 

Who  is  sitting  at  the  feet  of  Jesus? 

Who  comes  in  and  speaks  angrily? 

What  does  she  say  against  her  sister? 

What  does  Jesus  answer? 

What  was  Martha  so  busy  about?  Much  serving.  It  seems 
probable  that  she  was  preparing  a  great  dinner  for  the  Lord  and 
his  disciples ;  but  Jesus  preferred  simple  food,  such  as  fish  and 
bread,  honey  and  figs.  He  did  not  want  a  table  spread  with  dain- 
ties.    He  wanted  people  to  listen  to  his  words. 

Luke,  x.,  38,  to  end. 


134 


THE    BUSY    WOMAN. 


CLUSTEB  OF  DATES. 


THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    TO    MARTHA. 

"Martha,  Martha,  thou  art  careful  and 
troubled  about  many  things ;  but  one  thing  is 
needful;  and  Mary  hath  chosen  that  good 
part,  which  shall  not  be  taken  away  from 
her." — Luke,  x.,  42. 


THE  POOL  OF   8ILOAM. 


LESSON  XXXVII. 

THE    GRATEFUL    BEGGAR. 

A  poor  man  is  standing  by  a  pool.  There  is  a 
high,  rock  just  above,  and  the  water  trickles  down 
from  the  rock  and  fills  the  pool  beneath.  So  the 
water  there  is  sweet,  fresh,  running  water. 

What  is  that  poor  man  doing  at  the  pool?  His 
eyes  are  covered  with  a  thick  plaster  of  wet  clay.  He 
stoops  down  and  washes  off  the  clay  from  his  eyes. 
He  opens  his  eyes ;  he  looks  around ;  he  seems  sur- 
prised, and  hardly  to  know  where  he  is. 


136  THE    GRATEFUL    BEGGAR. 

He  soon  leaves  the  pool.  He  goes  along  the  streets. 
He  looks  at  every  thing  and  every  body,  as  if  he  had 
never  seen  them  before.  But  many  people  seem  to 
know  him,  and  every  one  who  does  know  him  looks 
at  him  with  astonishment. 

The  streets  are  crowded  with  people  going  up  a 
high  hill  to  a  marble  building  at  the  top.  Some  stop 
and  ask  questions  of  the  poor  man.  He  answers 
them,  yet  the  people  do  not  seem  satisfied  with  his 
answers. 

Now  they  are  taking  him  up  the  hill.  They  go 
through  the  gate,  up  some  steps,  into  a  court.  They 
go  no  farther  than  this  first  court.  There  is  a  fine 
hall  in  it,  with  a  roof  of  cedar  and  a  floor  of  many 
colored  stones. 

At  one  end  of  the  hall  there  are  high  seats  for  sev- 
enty men.     The  chief  of  all  is  the  high  priest. 

The  people  who  have  brought  the  poor  man  here 
complain  of  him.  Then  the  judges  on  the  high  seats 
ask  him  questions ;  then  they  talk  to  each  other,  and 
dispute  about  the  poor  man. 

At  last  a  poor  old  man  and  woman  come  in.  They 
look  very  much  frightened  while  the  judges  ask  them 
the  questions.  They  soon  go  out,  and  leave  the  poor 
man  who  washed  his  eyes  to  answer  for  himself.  He  is 
not  frightened,  but  stands  up  and  speaks  all  the  truth. 


THE    GRATEFUL    BEGGAR. 


137 


PRESENT   ASPECT  OF   THE  POOL   OF   SILOAM. 


His  judges  grow  more  angry  every  moment.  They 
insult  and  abuse  that  poor  man.  And  now  they  send 
him  away  in  deep  disgrace. 

The  poor  man  goes  about  the  streets  by  himself; 
no  one  is  allowed  to  speak  to  him. 

At  last  a  man  with  a  gracious  countenance  meets 
him,  and  speaks  to  him  very  kindly.  The  poor  man 
does  not  know  who  he  is.  But  soon  he  falls  down  be- 
fore Him.  and  worships  Him, 


138  THE    GRATEFUL    BEGGAR. 

What  pool  is  that?     Siloam. 

Is  there  any  other  pool  in  Jerusalem?  Yes,  a  much  larger 
pool,  named  Bethesda. 

Who  put  clay  on  the  man's  eyes? 

How  did  he  make  it? 

Who  are  the  judges  in  the  great  hall?  They  belong  to  the 
Sanhedrim,  a  council  of  seventy  judges,  who  met  to  consult  in  a 
great  hall  near  the  temple. 

What  makes  them  angry  with  the  poor  man  ?  They  were  really 
angry  because  his  eyes  had  been  opened  by  Jesus,  whom  they 
hated ;  but  they  pretended  to  think  it  was  wrong  to  cure  a  blind 
man  on  the  Sabbath-day. 

Who  were  the  poor  old  man  and  woman? 

What  questions  did  the  judges  ask  them  ?  The  first  question 
was,  "Is  this  your  son?" 

Did  they  answer  that  question? 

What  question  would  they  not  answer? 

Why  not  ?  Because  they  were  afraid  to  say  that  Jesus  had 
cured  their  son,  though  they  knew  he  had ;  so  the  parents  were 
liars,  for  they  said,  "We  know  not,"  when  they  did  know;  but 
their  son  told  the  truth,  and  said,  "He  hath  opened  mine  eyes," 
verse  30. 

What  punishment  did  the  judges  give  to  the  poor  man  ?  They 
cast  him  out;  that  is,  for  a  whole  month  no  one  was  allowed  to 
speak  to  him,  nor  to  come  within  an  arm's  length  of  him  (but 
he  might  go  to  the  temple). 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  the  man  when  he  met  him? 

Do  you  think  this  man  was  a  child  of  God?  Yes,  he  was. 
How  different  he  was  from  the  man  cured  near  the  pool  of  Be- 
thesda !  Observe  how  Jesus  spoke  to  that  man  when  he  met  him. 
See  John,  v.,  14. 

John,  i.,  10. 


THE    UNGRATEFUL    NINE.  139 


THE    WORDS    THAT    JESUS    AND    THE    POOR    MAN 
SPOKE    WHEN    THEY    MET. 

"Dost  thou  believe  on  the  Son  of  God?" 

11  Who  is  he,  Lord,  that  I  might  believe  on 
him." 

u  Thou  hast  both  seen  him*  and  it  is  he  that 
talketh  with  thee." 

"Lord,  I  believe."— John,  ix.,  35-38. 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 

THE    UNGRATEFUL    NINE. 

A  troop  of  poor  men  are  traveling  on  foot.  There 
are  thirteen  in  all.     One  of  them  leads  the  way. 

The  travelers  have  arrived  at  a  village.  Just  as 
they  are  going  in  they  see  some  men  standing  at  a 
distance  from  the  road.  These  men  do  not  come  near 
the  travelers,  but  they  stand  still,  and  call  out  with  a 
loud  voice. 

They  seem  to  be  miserable  men,  entreating  for 
mercy.     Their  skins  are  not  like  the  skins  of  other 


140  THE    UNGRATEFUL    NINE. 

men  in  that  country,  of  a  dark  and  sunburnt  color. 
They  are  made  loathsome  by  frightful  sores.  There 
are  ten  of  these  miserable  creatures,  all  standing  to- 
gether, and  calling  out  in  a  wailing,  beseeching  tone. 

The  leader  of  the  travelers  hearkens  to  their  cry, 
and  answers  them  in  a  voice  of  command. 

The  ten  men  turn  and  walk  away. 

Presently  one  of  them  leaves  his  companions ;  he  is 
coming  toward  .the  travelers ;  and,  as  he  is  coming, 
his  voice  is  heard  speaking  aloud  the  praises  of  God. 
How  different  is  the  sound  from  that  wailing  cry  that 
he  lately  uttered ! 

But  see,  how  much  changed  is  his  countenance! 
It  shines  now  with  health  and  happiness.  The  joyful 
man  approaches  his  gracious  Friend,  and  falls  down 
on  his  face  at  his  feet,  pouring  out  his  grateful  thanks. 

That  Friend  seems  surprised  to  see  only  one  man 
at  his  feet,  and  asks  a  question,  which  is  not  answered. 
Then  he  speaks  some  kind  words  to  the  poor  man. 

The  grateful  man  rises  and  goes  on  his  way. 

To  what  village  were  the  travelers  going  ?  No  one  knows.  It 
was  a  village  a  good  way  from  Jerusalem. 

What  was  the  matter  with  those  ten  men? 

Why  did  they  stand  so  far  off  the  travelers?  Because  their 
touch  made  people  what  is  called  " unclean;"  that  is,  unfit  to  en- 
ter the  temple  or  the  synagogue. 

What  words  did  the  ten  men  utter? 

What  command  did  Jesus  give? 


rr  ,*. 


THE    EARNEST    BEGGAR.  143 

Where  were  the  ten  men  going  when  they  were  made  well  ? 
To  one  of  the  thirteen  cities  where  the  priests  lived.  Of  course 
they  would  go  to  the  nearest.     Josh.,  xxi.,  13-19. 

Why  did  Jesus  tell  the  lepers  to  go  to  the  priests?  Because 
it  was  the  priests  who  offered  sacrifices  for  lepers  when  they  were 
made  well.     Lev.,  xiv. 

What  question  did  Jesus  ask  when  the  leper  fell  down  at  his  feet  ? 

Of  what  country  was  the  man  who  gave  thanks  ?  Of  Samaria. 
He  was  not  a  Jew. 

What  kind  words  did  Jesus  speak  to  him? 

Luke,  xvii.,  11-19. 
THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    ABOUT    THE    LEPERS. 

"Were  there  not  ten  cleansed?  but  where 
are  the  nine?  There  are  not  found  that  re- 
turned to  give  glory  to  God  save  this  stran- 
-ger." — Luke,  xvii.,  17,  18. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

THE     EARNEST     BEGGAR. 

By  the  river  side  there  is  a  grove  of  palm-trees 
eight  miles  in  length.  A  hill  rises  above  the  grove, 
and  there  a  large  city  is  built.  An  immense  crowd 
is  moving  along  toward  that  city. 

A  poor  blind  beggar  is  sitting  by  the  wayside,  at 


144        THE  EARNEST  BEGGAR. 

the  entrance  of  the  city.  He  hears  the  trampling  of 
feet  and  the  hum  of  voices.  He  can  not  tell  what  is 
the  reason  of  ^all  this  noise  and  confusion.  He  asks 
those  who  pass  by,  and  they  tell  him  what  it  is  all 
about. 

There  is  a  look  of  hope  on  that  blind  face.  The 
beggar  is  crying  out  very  loud.  The  crowd  have  just 
reached  the  place  where  he  is  sitting.  Those  who 
come  first  are  displeased  with  him.  They  speak  an- 
grily to  him  as  they  pass  by,  but  he  cries  out  louder 
than  ever. 

The  crowd  move  on;  suddenly  one  man  in  that 
crowd  stops.     All  the  people  stop  when  he  stops. 

That  man  has  a  gracious  look,  such  as  no  other 
man  ever  had. 

He  stands  still,  speaks  to  some  one,  who  goes  im- 
mediately toward  the  blind  man,  delivers  a  message 
to  him,  and  then  takes  him  by  the  hand. 

How  quickly  the  poor  fellow  arises!  He  throws 
aside  his  loose  upper  garment,  that  he  may  make 
more  haste.  He  is  standing  before  Him  who  sent  for 
him. 

That  Friend  is  looking  at  him  with  such  pity,  and 
speaking  to  him  with  such  kindness;  and  now  he 
places  his  hand  upon  the  blind  man's  eyes  for  a  mo- 
ment, and  utters  a  few  words.  ^ 


THE    EARNEST    BEGGAE.  145 

The  blind  man  opens  his  eyes;  lo!  he  can  see. 
What  joy !  Now  he  is  going  along  with  that  crowd, 
and  calling  out  with  a  glad  voice ;  and  many  others 
are  joining  in  the  praises  of  Him  who  opened  the 
blind  eyes. 

What  river  is  that? 

What  city  is  near  it? 

What  is  the  blind  man's  name? 

What  is  the  reason  of  the  noise  he  heard? 

What  words  does  he  call  out? 

What  does  the  messenger  say  to  him? 

What  question  does  Jesus  ask  him? 

What  does  the  blind  man  answer? 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  him  as  he  cures  him? 

Which  knew  most  about  Jesus,  the  blind  beggar  of  Jerusalem  or 
the  beggar  of  Jericho  ?  The  latter ;  for  he  knew  that  Jesus  was 
the  son  of  David ;  the  other  did  not  know  that  Jesus  was  the  Son 
of  God.  But  they  both  had  great  faith.  One  showed  his  faith  by 
calling  out  so  earnestly ;    the  other,  by  confessing  Jesus  so  boldly. 

What  great  difference  was  there  in  the  manner  of  their  cure? 
One  asked  for  help ;  the  other  was  helped  without  asking.  One 
was  cured  by  a  touch;    the  other  by  clay,  spittle,  and  water. 

Matt.,  xx,,  29,  to  end.      Mark,  x.,  46,  to  end. 

Luke,  xviii.,  35,  to  end. 

THE    WORDS    THAT    JESUS    AND    BARTIM^EUS    SPOKE. 

"  What  wilt  thou  that  I  shall  do  unto  thee  V 

"Lord,  that  I  may  receive  my  sight.11 

" Receive  thy  sight;   thy  faith  hath  saved 

thee.11 — Luke,  xviii.,  41,  42. 

K 


JESUS   NEAR  JERICHO. 


LESSON  XL. 


THE    HAPPY    PUBLICAN. 


Near  the  city  of  palm-trees  there  is  a  great  crowd 
moving  along  the  way.  In  the  midst  of  the  crowd 
there  is  a  man  not  so  tall  as  other  men.  He  tries  to 
see  some  one  in  that  crowd ;  but  he  can  not,  for  he  is 
so  short  that  the  heads  of  the  people  hide  that  man 
from  his  sight. 

He  has  found  out  a  way ;  he  runs  a  short  distance 
before  the  crowd ;  he  sees  a  tall  tree.     He  thinks  to 


^S{^m~ 


8YCAM0BE-TEEE. 


THE    HAPPY    PUBLICAN.  149 

himself,  "HI  climb  that  tree,  I  shall  be  able  to  see 
him  as  he  passes  by." 

He  climbs  the  tree. 

The  crowd  continue  to  move  along ;  at  length  they 
pass  beneath  that  tree. 

He  is  coming  whom  every  one  wishes  to  see.  The 
man  in  the  tree  looks  down  and  sees  the  top  of  his 
head,  when,  lo !  that  wondrous  man  looks  up  toward 
the  tree,  and  shows  his  blessed  face  to  him  who  is 
watching  in  the  tree.  Hark !  he  speaks ;  he  speaks 
some  gracious  words  that  fill  that  man  with  joy. 

Oh,  how  quickly  the  climber  comes  down  from  the 
branch  on  which  he  sat !  He  runs  toward  his  newly- 
found  Friend;  he  shows  him  the  way  to  a  house; 
opens  the  door  to  him,  and  spreads  the  table  for  him. 
But  there  are  proud  men  in  the  crowd,  who  feel  en- 
vious because  the  Lord  has  gone  into  that  house,  and 
they  stand  murmuring  and  whispering  together. 

And  now  that  little  man  whom  they  despise  is 
standing  up  and  speaking  to  his  Lord,  and  those 
around  are  listening  with  wonder  to  his  speech. 

The  Lord  is  pleased,  and  he  is  praising  the  despised 
man,  and  speaking  very  gracious  words  to  him ;  while 
he  is  much  displeased  with  the  proud  murmurers. 

What  is  that  city  with  the  palm-trees?     Deut.,  xxxiv.,  3. 
Who  is  that  little  man? 


150  THE    HAPPY    PUBLICAN. 

What  is  his  employment?  Collecting  the  public  taxes;  there- 
fore he  was  called  a  publican,  and  much  despised  by  the  Jews, 
who  hated  those  who  collected  money  for  the  Roman  emperor. 

What  tree  does  he  climb?  A  sycamore,  which  is  a  kind  of 
fig-tree. 


SYCAMORE  FIGS. 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  the  man  in  the  tree? 

What  do  the  murmuring  Jews  say  when  they  see  Jesus  go  into 
the  publican's  house? 

What  two  things  does  the  publican  promise  the  Lord  to  do? 

What  dishonest  acts  had  he  committed  ?  He  had  made  the 
people  pay  more  taxes  than  were  really  due,  and  had  kept  some 
of  the  money  for  himself. 

What  did  Jesus  say  about  the  publican  ? 

Why  did  he  call  him  a  son  of  Abraham  ?  Because  he  believed  in 
Christ,  and  Abraham  is  the  father  of  all  who  believe.    Rom.,  iv.,  11. 

Luke,  xix.,  1-10. 
THE    WORDS    THAT    JESUS    SPOKE    TO    ZACCH^EUS. 

"This  day  is  salvation  come  to  this  house, 
forasmuch  as  he  also  is  a  son  of  Abraham. 
For  the  Son  of  Man  is  come  to  seek  and  to 
save  that  which  was  lost." — Luke,  xix.,  9. 


THE    SORROWFUL    SISTERS.  151 


LESSON  XLI. 

THE    SORROWFUL    SISTERS. 

A  small  company  of  men  are  walking  along  the 
road.  They  are  close  to  a  mountain  covered  with 
palms  and  olives. 

On  the  hill  side  they  see  a  pretty  village,  shaded  by 
trees.  They  are  just  going  to  enter  this  village,  when 
a  woman  meets  them.  She  seems  to  be  weeping  as 
she  goes. 

She  speaks  to  one  of  the  travelers  in  a  very  sorrow- 
ful tone.  That  traveler  answers  her  with  words  of 
comfort. 

They  talk  together  for  a  little  while ;  but  soon  the 
woman  returns  to  the  village,  while  all  the  travelers 
remain  where  they  are. 

There  they  stay  for  some  time,  as  if  they  were  wait- 
ing for  some  one.  All  around  them  are  fruitful  trees, 
under  whose  shadow  they  may  rest. 

Now  a  great  company  of  people  are  approaching 
that  spot.  They  all  appear  to  be  mourning  and  weep- 
ing, but  there  are  two  women  who  are  more  sorrowful 
than  the  rest. 


152  THE    SORROWFUL    SISTERS. 

One  of  these  women  is  the  same  that  returned  so 
lately  to  the  village. 

The  other  woman  seems  quite  overcome  with  grief, 
for  as  soon  as  she  is  near  her  gracious  Friend  she  falls 
down  at  his  feet.  That  gracious  Friend  sees  her  tears, 
and  the  tears  of  all  that  company,  and  he  is  melted 
by  tender  pity. 

The  mourners  are  now  showing  him  the  way,  and 
he  is  following  them ;  and  as  he  goes  he  weeps. 

Those  tears  are  seen  and  noticed  by  many.  Some 
seem  to  think  those  tears  show  he  has  a  kind  and 
loving  heart,  but  others  only  wonder  why  he  weeps. 

There  are  many  proud  and  spiteful  people  watching 
all  he  does  and  says. 

The  grief  of  that  blessed  man  is  very  great  all  the 
time  that  he  is  walking  with  the  mourners. 

At  last  he  comes  to  the  grave.  That  is  the  place 
to  which  the  mourners  were  leading  him.  It  is  a 
cave,  and  a  great  stone  lies  at  the  entrance.  The 
weeping  Friend  gives  a  command;  but  one  of  the 
women  does  not  like  that  command,  and  objects  to 
the  thing  being  done. 

Her  Friend  will  have  it  done,  and  he  is  far  wiser 
than  she. 

The  command  is  obeyed. 

The  stone  is  rolled  away. 


THE    SORROWFUL    SISTERS.  153 

Then  He,  on  whom  all  eyes  are  fixed,  lifts  rip  his 
own  blessed  eyes  toward  heaven,  where  his  Father 
dwells,  and  prays  to  Him  in  the  hearing  of  all  the 
people. 

When  the  prayer  is  finished,  he  utters  with  a  loud 
voice  two  or  three  words. 

How  anxious  every  one  is  at  this  moment  to  see 
what  will  happen !  WTiat  a  solemn,  awful  moment 
it  is! 

There  is  a  sound  in  the  cave,  as  of  one  rising  from 
his  bed. 

Behold !  a  person  is  seen  standing  at  the  mouth  of 
the  cave. 

How  strange  is  his  appearance ! 

His  arms  are  bound  to  his  sides.  His  feet  are  fast- 
ened together  with  rolls  of  linen.  His  face  is  hid,  for 
it  is  covered  with  a  cloth. 

If  nothing  more  is  done  for  that  man,  what  will  be- 
come of  him  ?  He  will  never  be  able  to  release  him- 
self from  one  of  his  bandages. 

But  another  command  is  given ;  and,  lo !  men  press 
forward  to  loose  the  bandages.  Those  eyes  see  again 
the  light  of  day,  his  beloved  sisters,  and  his  adorable 
Saviour. 

Who  can  tell  the  joy  that  those  three  now  feel — the 
brother  and  the  sisters — as  they  return  to  their  peace- 


154  THE    SORROWFUL    SISTERS. 

ful  home — that  home  which  their  Saviour  has  so  often 
blessed  with  his  presence ! 

What  mountain  is  that? 

What  village  is  built  on  its  side? 

Who  is  the  sorrowful  woman  that  comes  first  to  Jesus? 

What  does  she  say  to  Jesus? 

What  does  he  say  to  comfort  her? 

Why  does  the  woman  return  to  the  village  ? 

What  do  people  think  was  the  reason  why  Jesus  wept? 

What  command  does  Jesus  give  first  at  the  grave  ? 

Who  objects  to  it,  and  why? 

What  command  does  he  give  to  the  dead  man? 

What  command  does  he  give  last  at  the  grave? 

Which  of  these  commands  was  wonderful? 

How  long  had  the  man  been   dead? 

John,  xi.,  18-46. 

SOME    OF   THE    WORDS    OF   JESUS    AND   MARTHA 
WHEN    THEY    MET. 

"Thy  brother  shall  rise  again." 

"I  know  that  he  shall  rise  again  in  the  res- 
urrection at  the  last  day." 

u  I  am  the  resurrection  and  the  life." — John, 
xi.,  23-25. 


THE    GRATEFUL    WOMAN.  155 


LESSON  XLIL 

THE    GRATEFUL    WOMAN. 

There  is  a  little  village  perched  on  the  top  of  a 
chalky  hill. 

Around  are  other  hills,  not  green  and  shady,  but 
white  and  chalky.  The  little  village  is  a  quiet  place. 
No  travelers  pass  through  it,  for  it  is  not  the  way  to 
any  town.  Beyond  it  there  is  a  wilderness,  where  no 
one  wishes  to  go.  That  little  village  is  fit  for  a  hiding- 
place.  Bad  people,  such  as  thieves  and  murderers, 
often  want  to  hide  themselves,  and  sometimes  good 
people  want  to  escape  from  their  cruel  enemies. 

There  is  a  good  man  living  in  the  village,  with  a 
few  friends  who  love  to  be  with  him. 

How  sorrowful  is  the  countenance  of  that  dear 
man !  How  pale  and  worn  his  cheeks !  How  tearful 
his  eyes !  How  thin  and  weak  his  body !  He  looks 
like  one  who  has  suffered  hunger,  and  thirst,  and 
weariness,  and  ill  treatment.  He  spends  many  hours 
in  prayers  and  in  tears.  Often  he  sleeps  not  in  the 
night,  and  in  the  day  he  is  teaching  his  friends  and 
preaching  to  the  people. 


156  THE    GKATEFUL    WOMAN. 

After  spending  many  days  in  the  village  he  leaves 
it,  and  goes  down  the  chalky  hill  with  his  friends. 
He  is  on  his  way  to  the  great  city.  He  comes  to  a 
hill,  adorned  with  olives,  palms,  and  fig-trees. 

He  enters  a  village  built  on  the  side  of  that  fruitful 
hill.  He  goes  to  the  house  of  a  friend,  a  man  who 
once  had  a  loathsome  disease,  and  has  recovered. 

That  man  gives  a  great  supper  to  his  Lord.  Many 
guests  are  invited.  Among  the  guests  is  one  whom 
every  one  desires  to  see,  because  he  was  dead,  and  is 
now  alive.  One  of  his  sisters  is  waiting  on  the  guests. 
Crowds  flock  round  the  house.  They  look  at  him 
who  was  dead. 

One  says,  "I  saw  him  die." 

Another,  "  I  saw  him  buried." 

Another,  "I  saw  him  rise." 

Then  every  one  speaks  of  Him  who  called  the  dead 
man  from  his  grave.  Many  look  at  Him  with  won- 
der and  with  faith. 

But  there  are  some  who  look  at  him  with  hatred 
and  envy.  They  did  not  know  where  he  was  when 
he  was  among  the  chalky  hills  in  the  quiet  village, 
and  now  they  see  him  again  they  hope  soon  to  have 
him  killed. 

"While  the  guests  are  at  supper,  a  woman  enters 
with  a  little  bottle  in  her  hand.     She  goes  up  to  Him 


THE    GRATEFUL    WOMAN.  157 

whom  she  loves  above  all,  and,  breaking  off  the  neck 
of  the  bottle,  she  pours  some  sweet  ointment  upon  his 
head  and  upon  his  feet,  and,  stooping  down,  wipes 
those  feet  with  her  long  hair ;  for  her  beloved  is  lying 
on  a  couch  by  the  table,  and  she  can  easily  reach  his 
feet.  The  sweet  smell  of  the  ointment  fills  all  the 
house  with  its  fragrance. 

When  the  guests  see  what  the  woman  has  done, 
some  of  them  are  displeased ;  for  there  is  a  man  there 
who  pretends  to  love  Jesus,  but  who  really  hates  him, 
and  this  wicked  man  speaks  against  the  woman  for 
pouring  the  ointment  on  her  Lord,  and  the  other  dis- 
ciples join  in  blaming  her. 

But  there  is  One  who  defends  her,  for  she  is  so 
meek  that  she  says  not  a  word  in  her  own  defense. 
The  Friend  whom  she  has  anointed  praises  her  very 
much.  His  praises  must  comfort  her  affectionate 
heart. 

But  the  spiteful  man  looks  more  spiteful  than  ever, 

and  seems  to  be  making  up  some  spiteful  plan  in  his 

head. 

What  village  is  that  among  the  chalky  hills  near  the  wilder- 
ness?    John,  xi.,  54. 

What  village  is  that  on  Mount  Olivet? 

At  whose  house  is  the  supper  made? 

Who  that  was  lately  dead  is  sitting  at  supper? 

Who  serves  the  guests? 

Who  anoints  her  Lord? 


158  THE    GRATEFUL    WOMAN. 

What  did  she  anoint  him  with  ?  With  ointment  made  of  a 
sweet  plant  called  spikenard,  and  the  ointment  was  contained  in 
a  little  bottle  (called  also  a  box).  Bottles  of  this  kind  had  stop- 
pers, and  were  sealed  up.  It  was  usual  to  break  off  the  neck, 
and  then  all  the  sweet  stuff  was  poured  out  at  once. 

How  much  was  the  ointment  worth  ?  Three  hundred  pence, 
which  are  equal  to  nearly  ten  pounds  of  our  money. 

Who  spoke  against  what  the  woman  did? 

What  did  he  say? 

What  did  Jesus  say  in  defense  of  the  woman? 

Did  the  woman  know  that  Jesus  was  going  to  be  buried  ?  She 
may  have  known  it;  for  Jesus  had  often  told  his  disciples  that 
he  should  soon  be  crucified  and  buried,  and  Mary  had  often  sat 
at  his  feet  and  heard  his  words. 

On  what  day  of  the  week  was  Jesus  anointed  ?  On  Saturday 
evening. 

How  soon  afterward  was  he  buried?  Just  six  days;  for  he 
was  crucified  on  the  next  Friday,  and  on  the  Friday  evening  he 
was  buried. 

John,  xi.,  54,  to  end ;  xii.,  1-12.     Matt.,  xxvi.,  6-14. 
Mark,  xiv.,  3-10. 


THE     WORDS     THAT     JESUS    SPAKE     IN     BEHALF 
OF   MARY. 

"Let  her  alone;  against  the  day  of  my 
burying  hath  she  kept  this.  For  the  poor  al- 
ways ye  have  with  you;  but  me  ye  have  not 
always." — John,  xii.,  7,  8. 


JESUS  ON  MOTJNT  OLITET. 


LESSON  XLIII. 

THE    ROYAL    RIDER. 

Upon  the  Mount  of  Olives  there  is  a  village  shaded 
by  fig-trees,  very  near  that  village  of  palm-trees  where 
Jesus  so  often  went. 

Just  at  the  entrance  of  this  village,  near  the  door 
of  a  house,  an  ass  is  standing,  and  a  young  ass  close 
beside  her,  and  both  are  tied  up.  A  great  many  peo- 
ple pass  by  those  asses,  for  two  roads  meet  at  the  spot 


160  THE    ROYAL    RIDER. 

where  they  stand,  and  both,  these  roads  lead  to  the 
great  city,  about  a  mile  off. 

But  there  is  no  danger  of  those  animals  being  stolen, 
for  the  owners  are  standing  close  by  them. 

Two  travelers  come  up  to  the  asses,  and,  without 
asking  leave,  begin  to  untie  the  asses. 

The  owners  are  surprised  to  see  men  taking  away 
their  asses,  and  they  speak  to  them ;  the  two  travelers 
answer,  and  then  the  owners  seem  quite  satisfied,  and 
allow  the  asses  to  go. 

The  men  lead  the  asses  away.  They  do  not  take 
them  along  the  road  leading  to  the  great  city,  but  just 
the  other  Way,  toward  the  village  of  palm-trees. 

They  meet  their  Master  on  the  road,  and  a  great 
many  people  with  him,  holding  palm-branches  in  their 
hands.  They  lay  their  garments  upon  the  young  ass, 
and  they  set  their  Master  upon  him.  It  is  an  ass  so 
young  that  it  has  never  been  made  to  carry  any  one 
before,  yet,  instead  of  resisting  when  it  feels  a  burden 
upon  its  back,  it  goes  quietly  along,  just  as  if  it  had 
been  broken  in. 

What  a  scene  of  joy  there  is  upon  that  mount! 
What  shouting!  What  singing!  The  people  who 
go  before  pick  the  branches  off  the  palms,  and,  after 
weaving  them  into  a  kind  of  matting,  they  strew  them 
on  the  ground ;  and  others  spread  their  garments  on 


THE    ROYAL    RIDER. 


163 


A   PALM-TREE. 


the  way,  that  the  young  ass  may  not  place  his  foot  on 
stones  or  dust,  because  he  bears  so  glorious  a  rider. 
But  amid  all  this  joy  there  is  the  low  murmuring 


164  THE    ROYAL    RIDER. 

of  those  who  hate  that  glorious  man.  They  can  not 
bear  to  see  the  multitude  treat  him  with  such  honor, 
nor  can  they  bear  to  hear  those  songs  of  praise.  They 
complain  to  Him  who  is  riding  on  the  ass,  but  he 
rides  on  without  attending  to  their  spiteful  words. 

He  is  at  once  like  a  king  and  like  a  lamb — as  gentle 
as  a  lamb,  and  yet  as  glorious  as  a  king. 

Thus  the  Master  rides  along  the  heights  of  the  hill 
till  he  comes  to  a  spot  whence  he  has  a  prospect  of  a 
splendid  city  on  the  opposite  hills.  Then  he  stops, 
looks  at  the  city,  and  utters  some  sorrowful  words — so 
sorrowful  that  the  tears  run  down  his  cheeks  as  he 
speaks. 

As  he  goes  down  the  hill,  the  people  continue  to 
sing  and  to  shout.  He  passes  oyer  the  little  bridge 
which  crosses  the  narrow  stream ;  he  ascends  the  steep 
streets  of  the  city.  Every  one  hears  the  shouting  and 
the  singing.  The  streets  are  thronged,  and  the  flat 
roofs  are  covered  with  wondering  faces.  If  a  king- 
were  entering  the  city  in  his  golden  chariot,  drawn 
by  prancing  horses,  there  could  not  be  more  rejoicing 
than  about  this  King,  who  rides  upon  an  ass. 

Where  does  the  King  stop  ?  He  has  no  palace  nor 
house  he  calls  his  own.  He  stops  at  his  Father's 
house,  that  grand  house  of  marble  and  of  gold,  the 
glory  of  the  city. 


THE    ROYAL    RIDER.  165 

He  goes  up  the  steps  into  the  outer  court,  and  finds 
it  filled  with  sellers  of  sheep,  and  oxen,  and  doves, 
and  with  changers  of  money.  He  drives  out  the  men 
and  the  beasts,  and  he  overthrows  the  tables  of  the 
money-changers  and  the  seats  of  the  dove-sellers.  He 
had  done  the  same  three  years  before,  when  he  had 
begun  to  be  a  preacher,  and  now  he  is  going  soon  to 
leave  off  preaching  and  to  die. 

Though  he  has  no  sword  in  his  hand,  the  sellers 
and  the  changers  flee  before  him,  for  God  makes  them 
afraid. 

When  they  are  gone,  other  people  come  into  the 
court.  Some  are  led,  and  some  are  carried  in,  but 
when  they  go  out  they  need  neither  leader  nor  bear- 
er. The  voices  of  children  are  sounding  loud  in  that 
court,  and  the  King  is  listening  to  them,  well  pleased, 
though  proud  men  frown,  and  try  to  stop  their  songs 
of  praise. 

Then  once  again  the  King  preaches  in  his  Father's 
house. 

When  evening  is  come  he  looks  around  him.  Then, 
with  his  twelve  friends,  he  departs,  and  goes  to  the 
village  of  palm-trees,  and  spends  the  night  there. 

In  what  village  are  the  asses  tied  up?  Most  likely  it  was  in 
the  village  of  Bethphage,  a  name  that  signifies  "  House  of  Figs" 
(as  Bethany  does  "  House  of  Dates"). 

What  do  the  owners  say  to  the  men  who  loosed  the  ass? 


166  THE    ROYAL    RIDER. 

What  do  the  men  reply? 

What  do  the  people  cry  out  as  Jesus  is  riding  on  the  ass? 
Why  does  Jesus  weep  as  he  looks  upon  the  city? 
What  do  the  people  in  the  city  cry  out  as  he  enters? 
And  what  is  the  reply? 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  the  sellers  in  the  temple? 
What  do  the  children  in  the  temple  cry  out? 
What  does  "Hosanna"  mean?     "  Save  us." 
What  verse  in  the  Psalms  did  Jesus  repeat? 
What  did  Jesus  preach  about?     See  John,  xii.,  44,  to  end. 
On  what  day  of  the  week  did  Jesus  enter  Jerusalem  on  the 
ass  ?     Sunday. 

Matt.,  xxi.,  1-17.    Mark,  xi.,  1-14.     Luke,  xix.,  29-46. 
John,  xii.,  12,  to  end. 

THE   WORDS    OF   JESUS    AS    HE    WEPT    OYER   JERU- 
SALEM. 

"If  thou  hadst  known,  even  thou,  at  least 
in  this  thy  day,  the  things  which  belong  unto 
thy  peace!  but  now  they  are  hid  from  thine 
eyes.1'— Luke,  xix.,  42.    , 


THE    FIG-TREE.  167 


LESSON  XLIV. 

THE   FIG-TREE. 

It  is  the  early  morning  of  a  spring  day.  The  blos- 
soms are  blooming  on  the  trees,  and  the  birds  are 
singing  in  the  branches. 

A  man  of  sorrows  is  walking  along  the  pathway  of 
a  hill  adorned  by  olive-trees,  fig-trees,  and  palm-trees. 
He  is  walking  toward  the  great  city,  accompanied  by 
his  twelve  friends. 

The  fig-trees  have  not  yet  put  forth  their  leaves, 
but  on  this  hill  there  is  one  fig-tree  different  from  the 
rest. 

That  tree  is  richly  adorned  with  large  dark  leaves. 

The  man  of  sorrows  goes  up  to  that  tree,  and 
searches  its  boughs,  but  he  finds  not  one  single  fig  to 
satisfy  his  hunger — no,  not  one.  He  speaks  to  the 
tree  as  if  it  had  sense  and  hearing ;  he  utters  words 
of  rebuke  and  displeasure.  All  his  friends  listen  to 
the  words  attentively.  Never  before  had  they  heard 
their  Master  speak  to  a  tree. 

They  all  go  on  toward  the  city,  passing  over  the 


168  THE    FIG-TREE. 

bridge  and  the  stream,  and  going  up  the  hill  into  the 
courts  of  the  marble  building. 

It  is  soon  known  in  the  city  that  the  great  Teacher 
has  come  into  his  temple,  and  numbers  of  the  people 
flock  around  him,  and  listen  to  him  all  the  day.  His 
spiteful  enemies  are  there  also.  The  priests,  who  are 
offering  sacrifices,  are  his  enemies;  and  so  are  the 
Scribes,  who  teach  the  Scriptures  to  the  people.  They 
watch  all  his  words,  in  hopes  of  catching  him  in  say- 
ing something  wrong,  while  the  people  wonder  at  the 
wise  things  he  utters. 

At  last,  when  evening  comes,  the  Teacher  leaves 
the  temple,  and  goes  out  of  the  city  to  his  favorite 
village.  He  goes  by  the  fig-tree,  but  it  is  now  dark, 
and  his  friends  can  not  see  it  as  they  pass  by. 

The  next  morning  they  go  along  the  same  path, 
walking  toward  the  great  city.  They  pass  by  the 
fig-tree.  The  friends  call  out  with  astonishment  at 
the  sight  of  its  wretched  condition,  for  it  is  entirely 
withered  awav.  The  fine  broad  leaves  are  withered, 
the  branches  and  the  trunk,  down  to  the  very  roots. 
That  tree,  which  was  fairer  and  finer  than  all  the  rest, 
is  now  the  worst  of  all.  One  of  the  twelve  disciples 
points  out  the  tree  to  his  Lord.  The  Lord  begins  to 
talk  to  them  about  that  tree,  and  to  tell  them  many 
other  things. 


THE    FIG-TREE.  169 

Then  lie  goes  to  the  temple,  and  teaches  there  for 
the  last  time.  It  is  the  last  day  that  his  sweet  and 
gracious  voice  will  be  heard  in  those  courts. 

On  what  day  of  the  week  did  Jesus  wither  up  the  fig-tree? 
On  Monday;  the  day  after  he  rode  into  Jerusalem. 

Why  did  he  expect  to  find  figs  on  it,  if  the  time  of  figs  was 
not  yet  come?  Because,  when  fig-trees  do  have  leaves,  they  have 
fruit  also,  if  they  are  good  trees. 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  the  tree  when  he  found  no  fruit? 

When  did  the  disciples  notice  the  withered  state  of  the  fig-tree  ? 
The  next  morning,  which  was  Tuesday. 

Which  of  the  twelve  pointed  it  out  to  Jesus? 

What  did  he  say? 

What  did  Jesus  tell  his  disciples  that  they  ought  to  learn  from 
the  fig-tree  ?  To  have  faith  in  God ;  that  is,  to  believe  that  God 
can  do  every  thing.  God  will  deliver  us  out  of  all  our  troubles 
if  we  have  faith  in  his  power,  and  if  we  forgive  our  enemies,  as 
Jesus  forgave  his. 

Matt.,  xxi.,  18,  19,  21-23.     Mark,  xi.,  12,  13,  18-27. 
Luke,  xix.,  47,  48. 

THE   WORDS    OF   JESUS    TO    HIS    DISCIPLES    ABOUT 
PRAYING. 

4 'When  ye  stand  praying,  forgive,  if  ye 
have  aught  against  any;  that  your  Father 
also  which  is  in  heaven  may  forgive  you  your 
trespasses.'" — Mark,  xi.,  25. 


170  THE    POOR    WIDOW. 


LESSON  XLV. 

THE     POOR    WIDOW. 

In  a  square  court  of  the  temple  the  wise  Teacher 
is  sitting,  surrounded  by  his  friends.  He  looks  fa- 
tigued, like  one  who  has  been  teaching  all  the  day. 

A  great  many  men  are  passing  through  the  court, 
but  none  except  Jews. 

Women  come  into  this  court,  but  they  do  not  go 
up  to  the  court  beyond. 

In  one  part  of  this  court  there  is  a  row  of  eleven 
chests,  and  each  has  an  opening  in  it  for  money. 

Proud  men  approach  these  chests.  These  men 
wear  upper  garments  adorned  with  deep  fringes,  and 
a  blue  ribbon  just  above  the  fringes.  Their  fringed 
garments  sweep  the  ground  as  they  walk.  The  proud 
men  drop  large  pieces  of  silver  into  the  chests,  and 
they  seem  to  think  themselves  very  good  for  putting 
in  so  much. 

But  the  Teacher,  who  is  observing  them,  does  not 
seem  to  think  them  so  very  good.  He  knows  how 
unkind  they  have  been  to  poor  widows,  and  he  sees 


THE    POOR    WIDOW.  171 

into  their  hearts,  and  knows  how  proud  they  feel 
when  they  put  the  money  in. 

But  now  the  great  Teacher  looks  pleased.  What 
is  it  he  sees  that  pleases  him  ? 

A  poor  widow  is  going  up  to  the  chests.  She 
seems  to  be  a  very,  very  poor  woman.  She  has  two 
very  little  pieces  of  silver  money  in  her  hand,  and 
these  she  drops  into  a  chest.  They  are  the  least  bits 
of  money  ever  used,  and  both  together  would  only 
buy  a  piece  of  bread. 

The  widow  little  thinks  that  any  one  is  noticing 
her.  She  does  not  wish  to  be  praised  for  her  small 
gift.  But  the  great  Teacher  calls  his  friends  to  listen 
to  him.  He  tells  them  about  the  poor  widow.  Oh, 
how  much  pleased  she  would  be  if  she  knew  how 
much  she  is  approved  by  Him  who  sees  her  heart ! 

And  now  the  blessed  Teacher  is  going  down  the 
steps.     He  is  leaving  the  temple. 

One  of  his  disciples  is  admiring  the  beautiful  stones, 
and  showing  them  to  his  Lord.  Some  are  of  enor- 
mous size ;  some  are  of  beautiful  colors. 

But  the  Teacher  does  not  look  at  them  with  pleasure. 
He  is  speaking  sorrowful  words  concerning  them. 

He  leaves  the  city,  never  to  return  there  except 
to  die.  His  teaching  in  the  temple  is  all  finished. 
He  will  never  teach  there  any  more. 


172  THE    POOE    WIDOW. 

Soon  afterward  lie  sits  upon  the  side  of  Mount  Oli- 
vet. He  is  looking  at  tlie  temple.  Four  of  his  friends 
are  with  him,  listening  to  his  words.  They  are  sur- 
prising words — they  are  sorrowful  words — they  are 
solemn  words. 

In  what  court  is  Jesus  sitting?  In  the  Court  of  the  Women. 
This  court  lay  above  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles.  People  might 
sit  in  the  women's  court,  but  in  the  men's  court  they  might  not  sit. 

What  were  the  chests  for?  They  were  to  receive  money  that 
people  gave  to  buy  sacrifices  and  other  things  for  the  temple. 
These  chests  were  called  the  Treasury. 

Why  did  men  wear  fringes  on  their  garments?  Because  God 
had  commanded  the  Jews  to  wear  fringes,  to  remind  them  of  His 
commandments.  See  Numbers,  xv.,  27,  28.  The  Scribes  thought 
that  deep  fringes  made  them  look  very  good,  so  they  wore  very 
deep  fringes  that  trailed  on  the  ground.  These  were  the  long 
robes.  See  Luke,  xx.,  46.  These  were  the  borders  of  their  gar- 
ments.    Matt.,  xxiii.,  5. 

How  much  did  the  poor  widow  put  into  the  treasury? 

On  what  day  did  Jesus  leave  the  temple,  never  to  teach  there 
any  more?  On  Tuesday  evening.  It  seems  that  the  last  words 
he  spoke  in  the  temple  were  about  the  poor  widow. 

What  did  Jesus  say  about  the  stones  of  the  temple  as  he  was 
going  away? 

What  four  disciples  listened  to  him  on  Mount  Olivet? 

What  did  he  tell  them?  That  Jerusalem  would  soon  be  de- 
stroyed. (It  icas  destroyed  forty  years  afterward.}  He  also  told 
them  that  he  would  come  again  some  day  in  the  clouds,  but  he 
did  not  tell  them  when.  He  has  not  come  yet,  but  we  are  ex- 
pecting him. 

The  last  prayer  in  the  Bible  is,  "Come,  Lord  Jesus." 

Mark,  xii.,  41,  to  end ;  xiii.,  all.      Luke,  xx.,  45,  to  end ; 
xxi.,  all. 


THE    TRAITOR.  173 

THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    ABOUT    THE    WIDOW. 

"All  they  did  cast  in  of  their  abundance; 
but  she  of  her  want  did  cast  in  all  that  she 
had,  even  all  her  living." — Mark,  xii.,  44. 


LESSON  XLVI. 

THE    TRAITOR. 

It  is  the  dark  night.  A  man,  with  a  look  as  dark 
as  the  night,  is  walking  down  the  Mount  of  Olives 
all  alone.  He  seems  to  be  a  wicked  man,  and  to 
have  a  wicked  plan  in  his  head. 

He  looks  like  a  child  of  Satan. 

He  enters  the  great  city.  ^ 

He  stops  before  the  gate  of  a  palace.  The  porter 
lets  him  in.  He  goes  through  the  court  of  the  pal- 
ace.    He  is  admitted  into  a  great  hall. 

Many  rich  and  proud  men  are  assembled  in  this 
hall. 

They  are  talking  over  some  plan.  They  seem  very 
anxious  about  it.     Is  it  a  murder  ? 

These  proud  men  look  much  astonished  when  they 
see  the  stranger  enter. 


174  THE    TRAITOR. 

He  tells  them  why  lie  has  come.  Then  they  look 
delighted. 

They  are  making  him  a  promise  of  some  reward, 
and  he  also  looks  delighted;  and  so  he  leaves  the 
palace,  and  returns  to  the  Mount  of  Olives. 

He  goes  to  a  little  village  there.  He  finds  his 
Master  there,  and  his  friends.  They  look  very  sor- 
rowful, and  he  tries  to  look  so  too.  He  tells  no  one 
where  he  has  been,  and  no  one  finds  out  except  his 
Master,  and  He  knows  every  thing.  This  man  little 
thinks  that  his  Master  knows  where  he  has  been. 

Who  is  that  man  walking  alone? 

To  what  house  does  he  go?  To  the  palace  of  Caiaphas,  the 
High-Priest. 

Why  does  he  go  in  the  night?  One  reason  was  because  the 
high-priest  was  at  home  only  in  the  night,  for  he  spent  the  day 
in  a  room  near  the  temple. 

What  are  the  priests  talking  about  when  Judas  enters  ?  About 
how  they  should  get  hold  of  Jesus. 

What  does  Judas  say  that  pleases  them? 

What  do  they  promise  to  give  him? 

Who  has  entered  into  the  heart  of  Judas?     Satan. 

Does  Satan  enter  now  into  people's  hearts  ?  Yes ;  and  that  is 
much  worse  than  getting  into  their  bodies,  for  by  getting  into 
their  hearts  he  drags  them  to  hell. 

On  what  day  of  the  week  did  Judas  go  to  the  priests?  Prob- 
ably on  Wednesday. 

When  had  Jesus  offended  Judas?  On  the  Saturday  before,  at 
the  supper  in  Bethany,  when  Mary  poured  the  ointment  on  his 
feet,  and  Judas  blamed  her,  and  Jesus  defended  her. 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  1-5,  14-16.      Mark,  xiv.,  1,  2,  10,  11. 
Luke,  xxii.,  1-7. 


THE    PASSOVER    PREPARED.  175 

« 
JUDAS. 

uThen  entered  Satan  into  Judas  surnamed 
Iscariot,  being  of  the  number  of  the  twelve." 
— Luke,  xxii.,  3. 


LESSON  XLYIL 

THE    PASSOVER    PREPARED. 

Two  poor  men  set  out  one  morning  from  the  Mount 
of  Olives  to  go  to  Jerusalem.  These  poor  men  are 
friends.  How  unlike  they  are  to  that  wicked  man  who 
went  the  day  before  from  the  mountain  to  the  city ! 

They  enter  the  city.  The  streets  are  crowded  with 
people,  who  are  going  to  shops,  and  carrying  burdens, 
as  if  they  were  €ill  preparing  for  feasts  at  home. 

A  servant  is  walking  along,  carrying  a  jug  of  water. 
The  two  poor  men  meet  him.  As  soon  as  they  see 
him,  they  follow  him.  They  turn  when  he  turns,  and 
they  take  care  not  to  lose  sight  of  him. 

At  last  the  servant  stops  at  a  house. 

The  two  friends  stop  also ;  he  goes  in ;  they  go  in. 
They  find  the  master  of  the  house  at  home.  They 
speak  to  him.     He  takes  them  up  a  few  steps  into  a 


176  THE    PASSOVER    PREPARED. 

large  room.  There  is  a  ltmg  table  in  it,  and  couches 
for  people  to  rest  on  while  eating  their  meals. 

The  two  friends  leave  the  house,  and  go  and  buy  a 
young  lamb.  It  is  without  spot  or  blemish.  They 
carry  it  up  the  hill  where  the  temple  stands.  They 
enter  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles ;  they  pass  through  it, 
and  through  the  Court  of  the  Women,  up  the  steps 
which  lead  to  the  Court  of  Israel.  They  give  their 
lamb  to  a  priest.  He  takes  it,  and  kills  it  in  the  Court 
of  the  Priests,  and  then  sprinkles  its  innocent  blood 
before  the  great  brass  altar.  There  are  thousands  of 
lambs  that  day  being  killed  in  that  court.  The  priest 
returns  the  bleeding  lamb  to  the  two  friends.  They 
take  off  its  white  skin,  and  cut  open  its  little  body. 
Then  they  bear  their  lamb  out  of  the  courts. 

They  buy  herbs  to  eat  with  the  lamb,  such  as  let- 
tuce and  endive ;  they  buy  fruit,  such  as  figs  and  rai- 
sins, to  make  sauce ;  they  buy  loaves  of  bread,  and 
some  weak  wine. 

They  bring  all  these  things  to  the  house  of  the  man 
who  lent  them  the  large  roqm.  They  are  allowed  the 
use  of  an  oven,  where  they  may  roast  their  lamb. 
They  place  a  stick  through  its  body  from  its  head  to 
its  tail,  and  another  stick  from  side  to  side ;  so  the 
two  sticks  are  like  a  cross,  and  the  lamb  is  crucified  in 
the  oven. 


THE    PASSOVER    PREPARED.  177 

They  give  the  lamb's  skin  to  the  master  of  the 
house,  to  reward  him  for  lending  them  a  room. 

When  the  lamb  is  roasted  they  place  it  on  the  ta- 
ble, "with  the  bread,  and  the  herbs,  and  the  wine. 
They  mash  up  the  figs  and  raisins  into  a  kind  of 
paste  or  sop.  There  are  dishes  and  cups  on  the  table. 
In  the  room  there  are  basins  and  towels  for  washing. 

When  all  is  ready,  they  return  to  their  Master  in 
the  village  and  tell  him  what  they  have  done. 

Who  are  the  two  friends? 

On  what  day  do  they  set  out?  On  Thursday,  the  first  day  of 
the  Passover.     That  feast  lasted  seven  days. 

Why  do  they  follow  the  man  with  a  jug  ? 

Who  lends  them  a  room  ?  No  one  knows  his  name.  It  was 
the  custom  for  the  dwellers  in  Jerusalem  to  lend  a  room  to  stran- 
gers during  the  Passover. 

What  was  the  lamb  in  the  Passover  to  keep  in  memory  ?  How 
the  first-born  of  Israel  were  saved  in  Egypt  by  a  lamb's  blood 
sprinkled  on  the  door-posts. 

What  was  the  lamb  in  the  Passover  to  show  forth?  How  Je- 
sus would  shed  his  blood  to  save  men  from  eternal  death. 

Why  was  the  lamb  roasted?  To  show  how  Jesus  would  be 
burned  by  the  wrath  of  God  against  sin ;  as  it  is  written  in  the 
Psalms,  ' '  My  bones  are  burned  as  an  hearth  ....  because  of  thine 
indignation  and  thy  wrath."     Ps.  cii. 

What  sort  of  bread  was  eaten  at  the  Passover?  Unleavened 
bread ;  because  the  Israelites,  when  they  left  Egypt,  had  no  time 
to  leaven  their  bread. 

Were  all  the  old  customs  observed  in  our  Saviour's  time?  No; 
the  lamb  was  not  kept  up  four  days  before  it  was  slain,  Exodus, 
xii.,  3-6;  nor  did  the  people  eat  it  with  shoes  on  their  feet  and 
a  staff  in  their  hand. 

Mat.,  xxvi.,  17-19.   Mark,  xiv.,  12-17.   Luke,  xxii.,  7-14. 

M 


178  the  passover  eaten. 

Christ's  message  to  the  man  in  Jerusalem. 
"The  Master  saith,  My  time  is  at  hand;  I 
will  keep  the  Passover  at  thy  house  with  my 
disciples. " — Matt,  xxvi.,  18. 


LESSON  XLVIII. 

THE    PASSOVER    EATEN. 

There  are  thirteen  men  around  that  table.  They 
are  lying  on  couches  or  sofas  along  the  sides. 

The  Master  is  giving  thanks,  and  drinking  a  cup 
of  wine  with  his  friends. 

The  supper  is  now  brought  in.  There  is  a  lamb 
roasted  whole,  bitter  herbs,  mashed  fruit,  and  un- 
leavened bread. 

Before  he  begins  supper  the  Master  rises,  takes 
off  his  loose  upper  garment,  and  ties  a  towel  round 
his  waist. 

He  pours  water  into  a  basin,  and,  going  up  to  one 
of  his  friends,  begins  to  wash  his  feet. 

This  is  the  way  in  which  he  washes  them.  As 
the  friend  is  lying  on  a  couch,  he  puts  the  basin 


THE    PASSOVER    EATEN.  179 

under  his  feet,  and  pours  water  over  them;  and 
then,  with  the  end  of  the  towel  round  his  waist, 
wipes  first  one  foot,  then  the  other. 

But  see !  one  of  the  friends  will  not  let  his  Master 
wash  his  feet.  His  Master  persuades  him,  and  then 
that  friend  is  very  anxious  indeed  that  his  feet 
should  be  washed. 

Now  that  dear  Master  has  gone  back  to  his  place 
at  the  table,  and  has  put  off  the  towel,  and  put  on 
his  loose  robes  again,  and  he  is  talking  to  his  friends. 

He  seems  to  be  giving  them  advice,  with  a  heart 
full  of  affection. 

Now  they  begin  to  eat  the  lamb  and  the  bread; 
they  also  drink  more  wine,  but  it  is  wine  mixed 
with  water. 

During  the  supper  the  Master  looks  very  sorrow- 
ful indeed. 

He  speaks ;  all  his  friends  are  terrified ;  they  call 
out,  and  look  at  each  other  with  wonder  and  dismay. 

One  of  them  is  leaning  his  head  upon  his  Master's 
breast.  Why  does  he  sit  nearest  his  Master?  and 
why  does  he  lean  his  head  as  on  a  father's  bosom? 
Surely  he  must  be  greatly  beloved. 

Another  disciple  makes  a  sign  to  that  beloved  one, 
as  if  he  wanted  him  to  whisper  something  into  his 
Master's  ear. 


180  THE    PASSOVER    EATEN. 

The  beloved  disciple  whispers,  and  his  Master  re- 
plies, but  not  loud  enough  for  others  to  hear. 

Then  the  Master  takes  a  morsel  of  bread,  and  dips 
it  in  the  dish  of  mashed  fruit,  and  gives  it  to  another 
disciple  lying  very  near  him,  but  not  leaning  on  his 
breast. 

That  man  is  not  like  the  rest.  His  countenance 
is  mean,  and  sly,  and  cruel.  He  takes  the  sopped 
bread  from  the  dear  hand  that  offers  it,  then  rises 
and  goes  out  of  the  room. 

No  one  knows  why  he  goes  out  except  the  Master, 
and  He  knows  full  well ;  and  he  says  something  to 
that  bad  man  as  he  is  going  out,  but  no  one  under- 
stands what  he  means. 

After  the  base  one  has  left  the  room  the  Master 
goes  on  talking.  He  speaks  to  that  man  who  did 
not  at  first  wish  him  to  wash  his  feet,  and  he  says 
something  to  him  which  grieves  him  deeply. 

Now  the  Master  takes  a  cake  of  bread,  and  blesses 
it,  and  breaks  it  in  pieces,  and  gives  a  piece  to  each 
of  his  friends;  and  as  he  gives  it  he  says  to  each 
something  very  sad,  and  very  sweet,  and  very  loving. 
Now  he  pours  wine  into  a  cup  and  gives  it  to  his 
friends,  that  each  may  drink  a  little ;  and  as  he  gives 
it  he  utters  some  more  sweet,  and  sad,  and  loving 
words. 


THE    PASSOVER    EATEN.  181 

How  much  troubled  those  friends  look  as  they  eat 
and  drink !  Their  Master  talks  to  them  a  long,  long 
while.  What  pains  he  takes  to  comfort  them,  though 
all  the  while  he  is  so  sorrowful  himself! 

At  last  he  sings  a  hymn  with  them. 

Now  he  rises  from  the  table,  and  goes  down  the 
steps  which  lead  into  the  court. 

He  walks  by  the  light  of  the  moon  along  the  dark 
streets,  crosses  the  bridge  over  the  narrow  stream, 
and  so  reaches  the  garden  on  the  other  side. 

As  he  walks  he  is  comforting  his  dear  disciples. 

On  what  day  of  the  week  are  those  thirteen  eating  that  sup- 
per?    On  Thursday;  the  day  before  the  Saviour's  death. 

What  did  Jesus  say  when  he  gave  his  disciples  the  first  cup 
of  wine?  He  said,  "Take  this,  and  divide  it  among  yourselves; 
for  /  will  not  drink  of  the  fruit  of  the  vine  until  the  kingdom  of 
God  shall  come."     Luke,  xxii.,  17,  18. 

Which  disciple  did  not  wish  his  Master  to  wash  his  feet? 

What  did  he  say  to  Jesus? 

What  did  Jesus  reply? 

What,  did  Peter  say  then  ? 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  all  his  disciples  after  he  had  washed 
their  feet? 

Was  it  the  custom  to  wash  the  feet  at  the  Passover?  No; 
only  the  hands. 

What  did  Jesus  say  which  alarmed  his  disciples?  "One  of 
you  shall  betray  me." 

What  question  did  they  all  ask  ? 

Who  leaned  on  the  Saviour's  breast? 

Who  made  him  a  sign  to  ask  the  Lord  a  question? 

How  did  the  Lord  answer  it? 

Who  left  the  room  during  the  supper? 


182  THE    PASSOVER    EATEN". 

Why? 

What  did  Jesus  say  which  grieved  Peter? 

What  did  Jesus  say  as  he  gave  the  broken  bread? 

What  did  he  say  as  he  gave  the  last  cup  of  wine  ? 

Why  ought  all  who  love  Jesus  to  take  the  Lord's  Supper? 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  20-30.      Mark,  xiv.,  17-26.     Luke,  xxii., 
14-39.     John,  xiii.,  xiv. 

Christ's  words  of  comfort  to  his  disciples. 
"Let  not  your  heart  be  troubled;   ye  be- 
lieve in  God,  believe  also  in  Me.      In  my  Fa- 
ther's house  are  many  mansions." — John,  xiv., 
1,  2. 


GETHSEMANE. 


LESSON  XLIX. 

THE    GARDEN. 

Twelve  men  have  just  reached  a  garden  gate. 
The  moon  is  shining  upon  the  olive-trees  which 
adorn  the  spot. 


184  THE    GARDEN. 

These  twelve  men  look  very  sorrowful,  but  one 
is  more  sorrowful  than  the  rest. 

This  man  of  sorrows  leaves  eight  of  his  friends 
near  the  garden  gate. 

He  takes  the  other  three  with  him  a  little  farther. 

Then  he  leaves  these  three,  and  goes  all  alone  a 
few  steps  farther  on  (about  as  far  as  a  person  could 
throw  a  stone). 

Behold  him  now  in  that  gloomy  garden,  kneeling 
down,  bending  low,  so  that  his  face  almost  touches 
the  ground,  and  praying  most  earnestly.  Oh,  how 
earnestly  he  prays !  so  earnestly  that  his  sweat,  like 
great  drops  of  blood,  flows  out  of  his  skin,  and  falls 
upon  the  cold  earth.  Oh,  what  a  sight !  the  Man  of 
Sorrows  is  bathed  in  his  own  blood. 

There  is  no  one  on  earth  to  comfort  him ;  but,  lo ! 
an  angel  comes  down  from  heaven,  with  better  com- 
fort than  man  could  give. 

After  a  while  he  rises,  and  goes  to  his  three 
friends  a  little  way  off;  but  he  finds  them  sleeping; 
he  speaks  to  them  a  few  words,  then  leaves  them, 
and  returns  to  his  place  of  prayer. 

He  prays  again,  then  rises  again,  and  goes  again 
to  his  friends.  Again  he  finds  them  asleep;  again 
he  speaks  to  them,  but  they  are  so  sleepy  that  they 
can  not  answer. 


THE    GARDEN.  185 


JESUS  FRAYING   ALONE. 


Again  lie  leaves  them,  and  again  lie  prays. 

Again,  the  third  time,  he  speaks  to  his  sleeping 
friends. 

But  this  time  they  rise  from  the  ground ;  they  can 
sleep  no  more ;  for,  behold,  a  troop  of  men  approach. 
Some  hold  swords,  and  some  hold  sticks,  and  some 
hold  lanterns  in  their  hands. 

One  of  the  troop  comes  forward,  and  goes  up  to 
the  Man  of  Sorrows  and  kisses  him. 

The  rest  are  just  going  to  seize  that  sorrowful  One, 
when  he  comes  boldly  up  to  them  and  speaks  a  few 
words.  Suddenly  the  whole  troop,  instead  of  seizing 
him,  go  backward,  and  fall  on  the  ground. 


186  THE    GARDEN. 

There  they  lie,  as  helpless  as  dead  men. 

How  easy  it  would  be  for  Him  they  seek  to  es- 
cape, but  He  will  not. 

His  enemies  rise  again  and  lay  hold  of  him,  but 
they  do  not  lay  hold  of  his  friends. 

One  of  those  friends  is  so  bold  that  he  draws  his 
sword  and  cuts  off  the  ear  of  one  of  the  enemies. 
Then  the  Master  puts  out  his  hand,  and  heals  the 
wounded  man.  That  hand  will  not  be  able  to  do 
any  more  good,  for  the  enemies  are  binding  both 
hands  with  cords ;  yes,  those  kind  hands,  that  have 
touched  so  many  blind  eyes,  and  dumb  lips,  and 
leprous  skins. 

His  friends  have  left  him  all  alone ;  they  have  run 
away ;  and  he  is  in  the  midst  of  his  enemies. 

He  goes  willingly  with  them.  There  is  no  need  to 
pull  or  drag  him  along;  it  is  enough  to  lead  him, 
even  as  a  lamb  is  led  to  the  slaughter. 

What  is  the  name  of  that  garden? 

How  do  we  know  that  the  moon  was  shining?  Because  on  the 
first  day  of  the  month  there  was  a  new  moon ;  and  the  Passover 
took  place  in  the  middle  of  the  month,  when  it  was  full  moon. 

What  are  the  names  of  the  eight  disciples  left  at  the  gate? 

What  are  the  names  of  the  three  who  went  farther? 

What  were  the  words  of  Christ's  prayer? 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  his  disciples  when  he  found  them  asleep  ? 

What  did  he  say  to  Judas? 

At  what  words  did  the  enemies  fall  backward? 

Who  cut  off  the  servant's  ear? 


THE   priest's   palace.  187 

Why  did  the  enemies  allow  the  disciples  to  escape  ?  Because 
Jesus  had  said  to  the  enemies,  "If  ye  seek  me,  let  these  go  their 
way." 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  36-57.      Mark,  xiv.,  32-51.     Luke,  xxii., 

40-54.     John,  xviii.,  1-12. 

THE    WORDS    OF    CHRISES    PRAYER. 

"O  my  Father,  if  it  be  possible,  let  this 
cup  pass  from  me ;  nevertheless,  not  as  I  will, 
but  as  thou  wilt." — Matt.,  xxvi.,  39. 


LESSON  L. 


THE    PRIEST'S    PALACE. 


A  great  multitude  of  fierce  men  are  hastening  in 
the  depth  of  night  toward  a  great  city.  They  are 
leading  a  meek  and  gentle  prisoner,  whose  hands  are 
bound.  Strange  it  is  that  so  many  men  should  guard 
one  single  prisoner,  and  He  so  weak  and  so  weary. 

The  multitude  reach  a  palace  gate.  There  is  a 
maiden  who  keeps  the  door.  She  lets  those  pass 
through  whom  she  knows,  but  others  she  will  not 
suffer  to  enter. 

The  prisoner  with  his  guard  passes  through. 


188  the  priest's  palace. 

But  his  friends  are  not  allowed  to  pass,  except 
one.  He  seems  to  be  well  known  at  the  palace,  for 
when  the  maiden  sees  him  she  lets  him  in. 

But  there  is  a  man  standing  at  the  gate  and  long- 
ing to  get  in  who  can  not  do  so.  How  anxious  he 
looks!  How  sorrowful!  At  last  the  other  man, 
who  got  in  so  easily,  returns  to  the  door.  He  sees 
his  distress ;  he  speaks  to  the  maiden,  and  then  she 
lets  him  in. 

How  glad  that  poor  man  looks  now  he  is  admit- 
ted !  But  he  can  not  go  far  in.  He  stands  amid  a 
crowd  of  servants  in  the  outer  hall.  There  is  a  fire 
in  that  hall,  for  the  night  is  cold.  The  servants 
gather  round  the  fire  and  warm  themselves.  The 
stranger  sits  down  with  them,  and  warms  himself 
too ;  but  his  eyes  are  often  turning  toward  the  place 
where  the  prisoner  is  standing. 

That  gentle  prisoner  has  been  led  into  a  great 
hall.  Many  proud  men  are  seated  on  high  seats, 
and  are  asking  him  questions  with  rough  voices. 
The  prisoner  answers  with  the  meekness  of  a  lamb. 
Yet  one  of  the  servants  standing  near  him  gives  him 
a  blow  on  the  face  with  his  hand. 

Does  that  barbarous  blow  make  his  face  redden 
with  rage?  Oh  no,  he  answers  sweetly  and  softly 
as  an  angel. 


the  priest's  palace.  189 

His  gentle  hands  are  bound ;  but  if  they  were  not, 
he  would  not  return  the  blow ;  and  even  now  how 
easily  he  could  burst  the  cords  that  bind  him ! 

Two  men,  with  deceitful  looks,  enter  that  lighted 
hall ;  they  are  speaking  against  that  blessed  prisoner ; 
the  proud  judges  listen  with  eagerness  to  their  ma- 
licious words;  yet  when  these  men  are  questioned 
each  by  himself,  their  words  do  not  agree  together, 
and  it  is  plain  they  are  telling  lies.  Then  two  more 
come  in,  and  then  two  more ;  but  none  are  found  to 
speak  the  truth.  A  great  number  of  men  speak 
against  the  prisoner. 

At  last  the  chief  of  the  judges  stands  up,  and 
speaks  very  angrily  to  the  prisoner. 

At  first  the  prisoner  does  not  answer  him,  but 
afterward  he  utters  a  few  words.  Then  that  chief 
judge  grows  more  angry  still;  he  pretends  to  be 
very  unhappy ;  he  takes  hold  of  his  upper  garment, 
and  tears  it,  to  show  his  grief.  He  looks  round 
upon  his  proud  companions,  and  they  all  join  with 
him  in  uttering  some  very  dreadful  words  against 
the  meek  prisoner. 

And  now  they  give  him  up  into  the  hands  of  their 
servants.  It  is  like  giving  up  a  lamb  to  be  torn  by 
dogs,  for  those  servants  seize  hold  of  him  and  begin 
to  torment  him.     They  mock  him ;  they  beat  him ; 


190  THE   priest's   palace. 

they  push,  him;  they  blindfold  him;  they  ask  him 
who  struck  him,  and  then  burst  out  laughing;  they 
pluck  off  the  hair  of  his  face ;  they  do  what  is  worse 
still,  they  spit — they  spit  upon  that  sweet,  that  glori- 
ous, that  beloved  face. 

"Oh,  how  do  angels  bear  the  sight!" 

Yet  he  hides  not  his  blessed  face  from  men's  cursed 
mouths. 

To  what  place  do  the  multitude  lead  Jesus?  To  the  palace 
of  Caiaphas,  the  high-priest. 

Which  of  the  apostles  gets  in  easily? 

Which  gets  in  aftenvard? 

How  does  he  get  in? 

Who  is  the  chief  man  among  the  judges? 

Who  strikes  Jesus  as  he  stands  before  his  judges? 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  that  mean  man? 

What  men  come  in  to  speak  against  Jesus?     False  witnesses. 

What  did  two  of  them  say  against  Jesus  ? 

Had  he  really  said  he  would  destroy  the  temple  ?  Yes,  but  he 
meant  his  body;  for  his  body  was  a  temple,  because  God  dwelt 
in  him. 

What  did  Jesus  say  at  last  which  made  the  high-priest  tear  his 
clothes  ?     He  said  he  was  the  Son  of  God. 

What  sentence  did  all  these  judges  join  in  pronouncing?  "He 
is  guilty  of  death !" 

Why  did  the  servants  ask  him  who  struck  him?  Because  Je- 
sus was  a  prophet,  and  knew  all  things,  and  the  servants  wished 
to  mock  him. 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  26-68.      Mark,  xiv.,  51-65,      Luke,  xxii., 
54,  55,  63-65.     John,  xii.,  12-16,  19-25. 


THE    PORCH.  191 

THE    WORDS    OE    JESUS    ABOUT    HIS    SUFFERINGS. 

"I  gave  my  back  to  the  smiters,  and  my 
cheeks  to  them  that  plucked  off  the  hair ;  I 
hid  not  my  face  from  shame  and  spitting." — 
Isa.,  L,  6. 


LESSON  LI. 

THE    PORCH. 

Around  a  fire  in  a  large  hall  a  number  of  servants 
are  warming  themselves.  There  is  one  among  them 
who  is  not  like  the  rest.  He  is  a  stranger,  and  not 
a  servant.  He  is  very  sad  to-night,  though  he  tries 
to  appear  cheerful ;  but  he  feels  very  anxious  about 
that  poor  prisoner  who  is  standing  in  the  next  room 
before  his  judges. 

All  at  once  a  woman,  who  keeps  the  door,  comes 
up  to  the  stranger  sitting  by  the  fire,  looks  earnestly 
at  him,  and  suddenly  cries  out,  as  if  she  was  much 
surprised.  The  stranger  answers  her  in  a  very  pos- 
itive manner.  But  the  other  servants  join  in  saying 
the  same  as  the  woman ;  first  one  and  then  another 


192  THE    POECH. 

look  at  the  stranger  and  call  out.  The  poor  man 
goes  on  answering,  but  as  no  one  seems  to  believe 
him,  he  looks  frightened,  and  gets  away  from  them 
all  by  going  into  the  porch. 

When  he  is  in  the  porch  he  hears  a  cock  crow,  for 
the  morning  is  soon  going  to  dawn.  A  good  while 
afterward  a  man  speaks  to  him,  and  then  a  woman, 
and  their  words  fill  that  poor  stranger  with  terror, 
because  there  are  many  persons  standing  by  listen- 
ing. The  frightened  man  answers  with  more  vio- 
lence than  ever. 

He  leaves  the  porch  and  returns  to  the  fire.  There 
he  talks  away  as  if  he  did  not  care  for  his  dear 
Master,  who  is  being  tormented  in  the  other  room. 
People  are  listening  to  him  as  he  talks  away  by  the 
fire,  and  they  observe  a  tone  in  his  voice,  and  a  way 
of  speaking,  that  remind  them  of  the  cities  by  the 
lake.  They  think  that  the  man  talking  by  the  fire 
has  come  from  one  of  those  cities,  and  that  he  is  a 
friend  of  the  prisoner.  Now  they  are  telling  him 
what  they  think.  That  man  is  denying  all  they  say. 
What  horrible  words  are  coming  out  of  his  mouth ! 
too  horrible  to  be  written  down. 

Suddenly  he  stops  speaking. 

What  has  he  heard  that  fills  him  with  dismay  ? 

Is  it  the  crowing  of  that  bird  ? 


THE    PORCH.  193 

What  has  he  seen  that  has  filled  his  eyes  with 
tears? 

Has  that  blessed  lamb,  who  is  in  the  midst  of  his 
tormentors,  fixed  his  eyes  upon  him? 

Something  has  happened  which  has  deeply  grieved 
him,  for  he  is  now  weeping  most  bitterly  in  the 
porch.  Let  him  weep  on.  He  has  much  to  weep 
about. 

Who  is  warming  himself  with  the  servants  by  the  fire? 
What  do  they  say  to  him? 
What  does  he  reply? 
When  did  he  first  swear?     In  the  porch. 

When  did  he  both  curse  and  swear?  When  he  returned  to 
the  fire. 

What  words  of  Jesus  did  Peter  remember  at  last?* 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  69,  to  end.     Mark,  xiv.,  66,  to  end.     Luke, 
xxii.,  56-62.     John,  xviii.,  17,  18,  25-27. 

THE   WORDS    THAT    PETER    REMEMBERED. 

u  'Before  the  cock  crow  twice,  thou  shalt 
deny  me  thrice/  And  when  he  thought  there- 
on, he  wept." — Mark,  xiv.,  72. 

*  In  St.  John's  Gospel  the  circumstances  of  the  first  denial  alone 
are  related. 

N 


VALLEY  OF  THE  SON  OF  HINNOM. 


LESSON  LIL 


THE    SUICIDE. 

The  morning  is  almost  come.  A  miserable  man 
is  walking  toward  the  temple.  He  enters  the  courts 
of  the  holy  place.  He  opens  the  door  of  a  great  hall. 
Though  it  is  so  early,  there  are  many  rich  and  hon- 
orable men  assembled  there.  They  are  the  same 
men  who  sat  up  during  the  night  in  the  palace  of 
the  high -priest.  These  are  the  judges  who  con- 
demned the  innocent  man.     Their  faces  are  weary 


THE    SUICIDE.  195 

from  want  of  sleep;  but  they  could  not  sleep,  for 
their  hearts  were  too  full  of  hatred. 

When  the  miserable  man  enters  they  are  surprised, 
yet  they  seem  as  if  they  knew  him. 

The  miserable  man  has  a  heap  of  money  in  his 
hand.  He  offers  it  to  the  proud  men,  but  they  will 
not  take  it.  So  he  throws  down  the  money  on  the 
floor,  and  suddenly  goes  out. 

Where  does  he  go  ? 

He  goes  to  a  dark,  deep  valley,  close  by  the  great 
city;  he  finds  a  tree  that  stands  on  the  edge  of  a 
steep  crag.  He  ties  a  rope  round  his  neck,  and  fast- 
ens one  end  of  the  rope  to  a  bough  of  the  tree,  and 
then  lets  himself  hang. 

Oh,  terrible  deed!     He  kills  himself! 

Lo!  he  falls  from  the  tree  into  a  deep  place  be- 
low, and  his  body  is  dashed  to  pieces. 

How  horrible  is  the  sight  of  that  mangled  corpse, 
lying  in  the  midst  of  blood  and  gore,  a  fit  feast  for 
vile  dogs  and  unclean  birds ! 

What  has  become  of  the  wicked  soul  that  dwelt 
once  in  that  loathsome  body? 

Who  is  that  miserable  man? 

Who  are  the  men  assembled  in  that  hall?  They  are  some  of 
the  seventy-two  judges  called  the  Sanhedrim,  of  which  the  high- 
priest  was  the  chief. 

What  does  the  miserable  man  say  as  he  returns  the  money? 


196  THE    SUICIDE. 

What  do  the  judges  answer  him? 

How  do  we  know  what  became  of  Judas's  body  ?  From  Acts, 
i.,  18,  19. 

Why  would  not  the  proud  judges  take  the  money?  Because 
it  was  the  price  of  blood. 

What  did  they  do  with  it  when  it  was  cast  down  ?  They  would 
not  put  it  into  those  chests  (called  the  treasury)  where  the  widow 
cast  in  her  mite,  but  they  bought  with  it  a  field  that  had  been 
dug  up  by  a  potter,  in  order  to  make  earthenware,  and  which  was 
of  no  use  except  as  a  burial-place.  These  wicked  judges  bought 
this  field  as  a  place  to  bury  Gentiles  in,  thinking  it  not  good 
enough  for  Jews,  because  it  was  bought  with  the  price  of  blood. 
Yet  this  field  teaches  us  that  Jesus  shed  his  precious  blood  in 
order  that  both  Jews  and  Gentiles  might  rise  from  the  grave  and 
live  forever. 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  3-11. 
THE  WORDS    OF  JUDAS  AND  OF  THE  CHIEF  PRIESTS. 

"I  have  sinned  in  that  I  have  betrayed  the 
innocent  blood." 

" What  is  that  to  us?  See  thou  to  that." 
— Matt,  xxvii.,  4. 


THE    GOVERNOR'S    PALACE.  197 


LESSON  LIII. 

THE    GOVERNOR'S    PALACE. 

Behold  that  magnificent  palace !  It  is  the  finest 
house  in  all  the  city — much  finer  than  the  high- 
priest's  house. 

The  man  whom  the  servants  tormented  all  night 
is  being  led,  bound  with  cords,  along  the  streets  to 
this  grand  palace.  He  looks,  indeed,  like  a  bleeding 
lamb,  as  the  morning  light  shines  upon  his  weary- 
body  and  his  sorrowful  face.  Oh,  how  that  face  has 
been  insulted!  But  it  will  be  worse  treated  still 
before  all  is  over. 

That  bleeding  lamb  is  surrounded  by  a  great  mul- 
titude of  people.  They  follow  him  to  the  palace 
gate,  but  no  farther.  The  soldiers  then  lead  the 
prisoner  in ;  his  enemies  remain  outside.  They  have 
lost  sight  of  him ;  he  is  inside  the  palace,  they  .are 
outside  in  the  streets. 

But  who  is  this  coming  out  of  the  palace  ?  He 
seems  to  be  some  great  one.  He  looks  like  the  gen- 
eral of  a  great  army.  He  wears  a  purple  cloak. 
It  is  fastened  by  a  clasp  over  one  shoulder. 


198     the  governor's  palace. 

The  crowds  in  the  street  can  see  him  well.  The 
proud  men  speak  to  him ;  and  oh !  what  hatred  and 
envy  are  in  their  countenances  as  they  speak ! 

The  great  man  does  not  know  how  to  answer 
them.  He  returns  to  the  judgment-hall,  where  his 
sorrowful  prisoner  is  standing.  He  soon  returns  into 
the  street.  He  speaks  a  few  words  to  the  proud 
men,  and  those  few  words  make  them  ten  times 
more  furious  than  before. 

See!  now  the  general,  or  governor,  is  giving  or- 
ders to  some  soldiers;  and  now  these  soldiers  are 
leading  the  bleeding  lamb  along  the  streets. 

A  number  of  his  proud  enemies  follow  his  steps. 

"Where  are  they  taking  him  ? 

They  are  taking  him  to  another  palace,  though 
not  so  fine  a  one  as  the  other. 

In  that  palace  there  is  a  king,  who  once  trembled 
at  the  name  of  that  prisoner ;  but  he  does  not  trem- 
ble now.  He  has  got  over  his  fears,  and  when  he 
sees  him  he  laughs.  Yes,  he  laughs  at  that  man  of 
tears  and  grief.  Yes,  he  laughs!  Soldiers  are 
standing  around  that  wicked  king,  and  they,  too, 
laugh  at  him. 

The  proud  men  who  followed  the  prisoner  are 
speaking  words  of  hatred  against  him.  And  the 
prisoner  is  silent.  Though  the  king  speaks  to 
him,  he  will  not  answer. 


THE  FLOOR  OF  COLORED  STONES. 


THE    GOVERNOR'S    PALACE.  201 

And  what  are  they  doing  now  to  that  sorrowful 
man  ?  The  soldiers  are  putting  on  him  a  fine  robe, 
all  glittering  like  silver.  This  they  do  to  mock  him. 
The  king  looks  on,  well  pleased. 

This  is  the  first  time  that  king  has  ever  seen  him. 
But  he  will  see  him  once  again,  and  then  he  will 
not  laugh,  but  weep  and  howl,  and  curse  the 
day  he  first  saw  that  blessed  man. 

And  now  the  soldiers  are  bringing  back  the  pris- 
oner, in  his  silver  robe,  to  the  great  hall. 

The  governor  seems  sorry  to  see  his  prisoner 
again.     He  does  not  know  what  to  do  with  him. 

There  is  in  the  street  a  high  place,  with  a  floor 
of  colored  stones,  and  a  magnificent  seat.  The  gov- 
ernor sits  down  upon  this  jud'gment-seat,  and  begins 
to  talk  to  the  people  in  the  street.  But,  the  more 
he  talks  to  them,  the  more  violent  they  grow;  the 
poor  people  join  with  the  proud  men  in  cruel  cries 
and  fierce  shouts. 

But  who  is  this  coming  with  a  message?  It  is 
a  servant.  He  is  come  from  the  governor's  own 
rooms.  He  has  something  very  serious  and  of  great 
consequence  to  say. 

The  governor  looks  frightened  as  he  listens  to  the 
message.  He  tries  more  than  ever  to  persuade  the 
multitude;  but  their  voices  grow  louder,  their  looks 
fiercer. 


202     the  governor's  palace. 

How  much  distressed  the  governor  appears !  He 
is  calling  for  something.  It  is  a  basin  and  a  jug 
of  water,  and  he  is  washing  his  hands  as  he  sits  on 
that  judgment-seat,  and  he  seems  to  wish  that  every 
body  should  see  what  he  is  doing.  And  they  do 
see  it,  and  as  they  look  they  utter  a  horrible  cry. 

And  now  soldiers  are  leading  into  the  street  a 
wicked-looking  wretch.  They  are  knocking  off  the 
chains  from  his  hands  and  his  feet,  and  are  setting 
him  free ;  and  the  multitude  seem  pleased  ! 

Other  soldiers  are  binding  the  blessed  lamb  to  a 
post  or  pillar;  they  are  stripping  the  garment  off 
his  back;  they  are  beating  him  with  knotted  ropes, 
made  harder  by  little  sharp-pointed  bones.  That 
back  is  covered  now  with  bleeding  stripes. 

And  the  multitude  seem  pleased! 

Now  the  soldiers  are  hurrying  that  bleeding  one 
again  into  the  hall.  All  the  soldiers  have  gathered 
round  him ;  there  are  at  least  six  hundred — six  hund- 
red tormentors  of  one  bleeding,  fainting,  gentle  lamb ! 
They  are  stripping  off  his  garments,  all  stained  with 
blood;  they  are  putting  on  him  a  purple  garment. 
Some  are  plaiting  long  thorns,  and  making  it  in  the 
form  of  a  crown.  They  place  it  on  that  drooping 
head ;  they  put  a  reed  in  that  drooping  hand ;  they 
bow  the  knee,  then  rise  to — mock.      They  lift  up 


THE    GOVERNOR'S    PALACE.  203 

their  hands  and  strike  that  face.  They  take  the 
reed  out  of  his  hand  and  beat  him  on  the  head — the 
head  bound  with  thorns.  They  do  still  more — 
they  spit  upon  him. 

The  governor  comes  in ;  he  sees  what  the  soldiers 
are  doing.  The  governor  goes  back  into  the  street, 
and  the  bleeding  lamb  goes  out  also.  The  governor 
points  to  him,  as  if  he  wished  the  people  to  look 
at  him. 

There  he  stands,  where  all  can  see  him,  in  his  pur- 
ple robe,  with  his  crown  of  thorns. 

What  do  his  enemies  feel  when  they  see  that  face 
covered  with  blood,  and  bruises,  and  spittle  ?  Alas ! 
they  feel  no  pity.  They  cry  out  against  him  as  loud 
as  before. 

The  governor  looks  alarmed.  He  takes  the  pris- 
oner back  into  the  hall ;  he  speaks  to  him  again,  and 
the  prisoner  answers  him.  Oh,  how  that  governor 
seems  to  wish  to  let  him  go !  But  he  hears  the  peo- 
ple in  the  street  crying  out,  and  he  is  afraid  of  dis- 
pleasing them.  Oh,  foolish  man,  to  displease  the 
God  who  can  cast  thy  soul  into  hell ! 

He  brings  the  prisoner  "back  again  into  the  street ; 
again  he  mounts  his  judgment-seat.  He  points  once 
more  to  the  bleeding  lamb,  wearing  the  thorny 
crown ;  but  the  people  will  not  hear. 


204     THE  governor's  palace. 

They  repeat  their  cruel  cry. 

And  now  the  governor  commits  his  great  sin — he 

CONDEMNS  THE  INNOCENT  LAMB  ! 

Oh,  terrible  moment,  when  Man  condemned  his 
God  to  die! 

Who  was  the  governor  of  Judaea?  Pontius  Pilate,  a  Roman, 
appointed  by  the  Roman  Emperor  Caesar. 

Where  did  he  live  when  at  Jerusalem?  In  a  palace  built  by 
Herod  the  Great,  the  finest  in  Jerusalem. 

Why  would  not  the  priests  enter  that  palace?  Because  it  was 
inhabited  by  a  Gentile,  and  they  thought  that  to  enter  it  would 
make  them  unclean,  and  unfit  to  eat  the  Passover. 

But  had  they  not  eaten  the  Passover  the  day  before?  Yes; 
but  the  feast  lasted  seven  days. 

What  do  the  Jews  accuse  Jesus  of?  Of  making  himself  a 
king;  for  they  thought  that  as  Pilate  wished  to  please  his  mas- 
ter (the  Emperor  of  Rome),  he  would  punish  any  one  who  called 
himself  a  king. 

To  what  other  judge  does  Pilate  send  Jesus  ?  To  that  Herod 
(King  of  Galilee)  who  had  killed  John  the  Baptist. 

What  message  is  brought  to  Pilate  while  he  is  on  his  judg- 
ment-seat ? 

Why  does  Pilate  wash  his  hands?  As  a  sign  that  he  washes 
away  the  guilt  of  condemning  an  innocent  man;  but  water  can 
not  wash  away  guilt. 

Whom  do  the  people  ask  Pilate  to  release  instead  of  Jesus? 

What  do  the  soldiers  say  when  they  mock  Jesus? 

What  words  does  Pilate  utter  when  he  shows  Jesus  to  the 
people  ? 

What  do  they  reply? 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  11-30.      Mark,  xv.,  1-19.      Luke,  xxiii., 
1-25.     John,  xviii.,  28;  xix.,  16. 


THE    WORDS    OF    PILATE    AND    THE   JEWS    ABOUT 
JESUS. 

u Behold  your  king!1' 

"Away  with  him !  away  with  him  !  crucify 
him!" 

" Shall  I  crucify  your  king?" 

"We  have  no  king  but  Caesar." — John, 
xix.,  14,  15. 


OA1.VABY. 


LESSON  LIV. 

THE     CRUCIFIXION. 

The  streets  of  Jerusalem  are  crowded  with  peo- 
ple ;  the  doors,  the  windows,  the  roofs  of  the  houses 
are  filled  with  lookers-on. 

All  eyes  are  fixed  upon  a  man  who  is  creeping 
along  the  way,  bending  beneath  the  weight  of  an 
enormous  beam  of  wood.  His  back  is  bathed  in 
blood,  his  clothes  are  stained  with  blood,  his  brows 
are  streaming  with  blood.     It  seems  as  if  he  would 


THE    CRUCIFIXION.  207 

sink  under  the  burden  he  bears,  and  expire  on  the 
spot.  Why  do  none  of  the  soldiers  that  surround 
him  help  to  carry  his  load  ?  Cruel  men !  they  follow 
him  with  taunts  and  jeers.  Does  no  one  come  to 
his  relief?  Not  one.  Some  would  like  to  help  him, 
but  they  dare  not. 

Here  is  a  man  coming  down  the  street.  His  dark 
complexion  shows  that  he  was  born  under  a  burning 
sun.  He  is  a  stranger  in  Jerusalem,  though  he  is  a 
Jew.  He  is  only  just  entering  the  city.  The  sol- 
diers seize  this  man,  and  make  him  help  the  bleed- 
ing lamb  to  bear  his  load.  It  is  not  out  of  pity 
they  do  this,  but  out  of  cruelty,  for  they  wish  their 
victim  to  live  longer,  that  they  may  torment  him 
more. 

There  is  a  company  of  women  walking  after  the 
bleeding  lamb,  weeping  and  wailing  as  they  go. 

He  notices  their  tears ;  he  turns  toward  them,  and 
speaks  to  them. 

But  see,  two  men  bearing  crosses,  whom  the  sol- 
diers are  driving  along.  Their  faces  are  not  meek 
and  holy,  like  the  face  of  the  lamb,  but  wicked  and 
wretched. 

The  crowd  moves  on.  They  do  not  go  toward 
the  Mount  of  Olives,  but  just  the  other  way.  They 
pass  through  the  gate  of  the  city ;  they  come  to  a 


208  THE    CRUCIFIXION. 

place  of  rocks  and  crags,  a  horrible  and  loathsome 
spot,  where  dead  men's  bones  are  strewed  about. 

Here  the  wicked  crew  stop. 

It  is  now  nearly  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

The  soldiers  take  hold  of  their  prey,  and  they 
strip  his  clothes  off  his  bleeding  body.  They  offer 
him  a  draught  of  vinegar,  mixed  with  bitter  myrrh 
and  more  bitter  gall.     He  tastes,  but  will  not  drink. 

Four  soldiers  stretch  his  wounded  limbs  on  the 
rough  wood,  and  each  soldier  thrusts  a  great  nail 
into  his  tender  hand  or  tender  foot.  They  lift  up 
the  Cursed  Cross,  and  the  Blessed  Man  hangs  on 
it  by  the  nails  in  his  agonized  hands  and  feet. 

Lo !  he  speaks.  Those  uplifted  eyes  show  that  he 
is  speaking  to  God.  It  is  a  prayer.  Is  it  a  prayer 
for  vengeance,  or  for  the  pardon  of  his  murderers  ? 

Four  soldiers  are  busy  at  the  foot  of  the  cross. 
What  are  they  tearing-  and  dividing  ?  Blood-stained 
garments. 

Now  they  are  admiring  one  of  the  garments.  It 
is  a  short  cloak,  or  vesture,  which  has  no  seam,  but 
is  made  of  one  piece.  They  are  casting  lots.  One 
soldier  draws  the  right  lot,  and  seizes  the  cloak  for 
his  own.  Will  he  ever  wear  that  cloak  ?  How  will 
he  feel  when  he  remembers  the  man  whom  he  treat- 
ed so  cruelly? 


THE    CRUCIFIXION.  209 

Numbers  of  people  are  passing  by  that  cross,  and 
gazing  and  staring  at  the  Crucified  One. 

As  they  pass,  they  look  up  at  a  placard  just  above 
his  head ;  there  is  writing  on  it,  in  three  languages, 
and  some  read  the  words  in  one  language  and  some 
in  another.  The  governor  is  standing  by.  Some 
of  the  Jews  speak  to  him  about  these  words,  as  if 
they  did  not  like  them ;  but  he  answers  them  in  a 
determined,  positive  manner. 

The  soldiers  are  sitting  on  the  ground,  with  their 
eyes  fixed  upon  the  Crucified  Man;  and,  as  they 
look,  they  laugh!  Now  and  then  one  of  them 
fetches  a  cup  of  vinegar  and  offers  it  to  him,  just 
to  mock  him  in  his  thirst  and  pain. 

The  people  are  pressing  in  crowds  to  view  him; 
but,  instead  of  praising  him,  as  they  once  did,  they 
are  mocking  him. 

Even  the  proud  priests  and  counselors  come  to 
look  at  the  man  they  hate ;  they  come  to  insult  him 
in  his  dying  hour,  to  pout  out  their  lips,  and  to 
shake  their  heads  at  him. 

Can  it  be  that  those  wicked  wretches  hanging  on 
the  crosses  at  his  side  are  joining  in  the  mockery? 
Yes ;  they,  even  they,  insult  him. 

But,  lo!  one  of  them  seems  to  be  looking  with 
penitent  eyes  at  that  cross  in  the  midst,  and  to  be 

O 


210  THE    CRUCIFIXION. 

offering  up  a  prayer.  The  Crucified  One  hears  the 
prayer,  and  gives  an  answer  fall  of  grace  and  peace. 
So  now  that  sorrowful  thief  is  filled  with  comfort, 
while  the  other  continues  murmuring  and  miserable. 

Among  the  cruel  troop  around  the  cross  there  are 
a  few  with  weeping  eyes.  There  is  a  woman  of  a 
meek  and  gentle  spirit.  She  seems  pierced  to  the 
heart  with  grief.  Beside  her  stands  a  young  man, 
who  seems  to  feel  for  her. 

The  blessed  eyes  look  down  from  the  cross  upon 
those  two  sorrowful  ones.  The  Crucified  Man  speaks 
a  few  words,  first  to  one,  then  to  the  other.  Now 
that  young  man  looks  at  the  woman  as  if  he  loved 
her  as  a  mother.  He  is  taking  care  of  her  in  her 
grief.     He  will  not  leave  her  to  weep  alone. 

The  sun  was  shining  in  all  its  brightness  upon 
the  sinful  multitude.  Suddenly  he  hides  his  head, 
and  darkness  is  spread  over  the  place.  Those  mock- 
ing faces  can  not  now  be  seen,  and  that  dying  face 
can  not  now  be  stared  at. 

Every  one  is  frightened  at  this  sudden  and  thick 
darkness.  Hour  after  hour  passes;  the  darkness 
goes  not  away  for  three  whole  hours. 

After  three  hours,  when  it  is  three  o'clock,  a  very 
bitter  cry  is  heard. 

Many  do  not  understand  the  words  of  that  cry. 


THE    CRUCIFIXION.  211 

They  think  the  Dying  One  has  called  for  a  prophet 
to  help  him,  for  they  know  not  that  He  trusts  only 
in  his  God. 

Hark !  another  cry !     It  is  only  a  word. 

That  word  is  understood. 

Behold!  a  man  runs,  takes  a  sponge,  and  dips  it 
in  a  jar  of  vinegar ;  he  then  puts  it  on  the  end  of  a 
long  straight  branch,  and  with  a  reed  he  tries  to 
reach  the  parched  lips  of  the  dying  lamb.  The  suf- 
ferer just  tastes  it,  and  speaks  once  more. 

A  very  loud  voice  is  heard.  It  is  like  the  voice 
of  prayer.  Those  lips  have  spoken  their  last  words. 
The  head  droops  upon  the  breast ;  the  breath  has 
ceased. 

At  the  same  moment  there  is  a  dreadful  shaking 
of  the  ground ;  it  cracks ;  it  heaves ;  the  hard  rocks 
are  torn,  and  the  caves  where  dead  bodies  lie  hid 
burst  open. 

Men  shake  with  terror ;  even  the  soldiers  tremble ; 
and  the  people  are  beating  their  breasts,  and  return- 
ing home  frightened  and  miserable. 

Who  helps  Jesus  to  bear  his  cross?  A  man  born  in  Africa, 
though  a  Jew. 

What  does  Jesus  say  to  the  weeping  women  ?  ' '  Weep  not  for 
me,  but  for  yourselves  and  for  your  children." 

Why  were  they  to  weep  for  themselves?  Because  the  Jews 
were  soon  to  be  punished  for  the  murder  of  the  Lord  by  the  Ro- 
mans coming  and  destroying  Jerusalem. 


212  THE    CRUCIFIXION. 

What  was  the  name  of  the  place  where  Jesus  was  crucified? 
Golgotha,  which  means  in  Hebrew  the  Place  of  a  Skull.  Calvary 
means  the  same  in  Greek. 

How  many  times  did  Jesus  speak  while  on  the  cross?  Seven 
times. 

What  was  his  first  prayer  while  on  the  cross? 

What  did  he  say  to  the  thief? 

What  did  he  say  to  the  two  sorrowful  ones? 

What  bitter  cry  did  he  utter  which  was  not  understood? 

What  words  did  he  speak  which  made  the  soldier  fetch  vinegar? 

What  did  he  say  when  he  had  drunk  the  vinegar?  "It  is 
finished,"  or,  "It  is  fulfilled,"  meaning,  "The  words  of  God 
about  me  are  fulfilled." 

What  was  the  last  prayer  he  offered  up? 

What  did  the  soldiers  say  when  the  earthquake  came?  "Truly 
this  was  the  Son  of  God." 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  31-54.      Mark,  xv.,  20-39.      Luke,  xxiii., 
26-49.     John,  xix.,  17-30. 

THE    THIEF'S    PRAYER    AND    CHRIST^    ANSWER. 

44  Lord,  remember  me  when  thou  comest 
into  thy  kingdom.'1 

44  Verily  I  say  unto  thee,  To-day  shalt  thou 
be  with  me  in  paradise." — Luke,  xxiii.,  42,  43. 


THE    SOLDIER'S    SPEAR.  213 


LESSON  LV. 

THE    SOLDIER'S    SPEAR. 

Three  crosses  are  standing  upon  that  rocky- 
ground.  Three  bodies  are  hanging  upon  those 
crosses.  The  darkness  is  gone,  and  the  sun's  set- 
ting beams  are  shining  upon  those  bleeding  bodies. 

A  good  way  off  a  number  of  people  are  standing, 
looking  with  fond  affection  upon  the  body  which 
hangs  upon  the  middle  cross.  Many  women  are 
there,  and  also  one  of  the  apostles.  What  grief  is 
in  those  faces  as  they  gaze  upon  the  cross! 

Suddenly  a  captain  with  some  soldiers  approaches. 
"What  are  they  going  to  do?  How  anxiously  the 
friends  of  the  Crucified  One  watch  all  the  move- 
ments of  these  cruel  men ! 

The  soldiers  look  at  one  of  the  thieves;  the 
wretched  man  breathes  still;  they  break  the  bones 
of  his  legs  with  the  butt-end  of  their  weapons,  and 
so  leave  him  quite  dead. 

Then  they  look  at  the  other  thief.  Is  he  the  thief 
who  obtained  mercv?     Call  him  not  wretched.     He 


214  the  soldier's  spear. 

is  going  to  have  a  glorious  supper.  He  breathes 
still.  The  soldiers  break  his  legs  as  they  did  the 
legs  of  the  other,  and  leave  him  quite  dead. 

They  come  next  to  the  body  that  hangs  on  the 
middle  cross.  His  bleeding  head  is  bowed  down 
upon  His  breast.     He  breathes  no  more. 

Will  the  cruel  soldiers  insult  the  dead  body  as 
they  did  the  dying  men? 

Oh,  how  the  friends  who  are  watching  afar  off 
tremble  for  the  body  of  their  Lord ! 

One  of  the  soldiers  thrusts  his  spear  into  the  side 
of  the  crucified  body,  and  a  stream  of  blood  and  wa- 
ter flows  out  of  the  wound.  The  soldiers  go  away, 
but  the  friends  stand  by,  looking  at  that  gaping 
wound  and  at  that  purple  stream. 

Not  one  bone  of  their  precious  Lord  has  been 
broken,  though  his  blood  has  been  shed  so  abundant- 
ly. His  body  has  been  broken,  as  he  said,  but  not 
his  bones. 

Who  sent  the  soldiers  to  kill  the  crucified  men  ?    Pontius  Pilate. 

Who  asked  him  to  send  them  ?    The  chief  men  among  the  Jews. 

Why  did  they  wish  the  crucified  men  to  be  killed  ?  That  their 
bodies  might  be  taken  down  from  their  crosses  before  the  Sabbath 
began.  The  Sabbath  began  at  six  o'clock  on  Friday  evening,  and 
Jesus  died  at  three. 

Why  did  the  Jews  object  to  the  bodies  hanging  on  the  crosses 
during  the  Sabbath?  Because  God  had  forbidden  that  a  body 
should  remain  upon  a  tree  (or  wooden  cross)  during  the  night. 


THE    SOLDIER'S    SPEAR.  215 

If  a  body  might  not  remain  on  a  cross  during   any  night,  how 
much  less  during  the  Sabbath  night!     Deut.,  xxi.,  22,  23. 

Why  was  the   Sabbath  after  Christ's  death  greater  than  other 
Sabbaths?     Because  it  was  the  Sabbath  in  the  Passover  week. 

John,  xix.,  31-37. 
johx's  words  about  the  second  coming 

OF    JESUS. 

"Behold,  he  cometh  with  clouds  ;  and  every 
eye  shall  see  him,  and  they  also  which  pierced 
him ;  and  all  kindreds  of  the  earth  shall  wail 
because  of  him." — Rev.,  i.,  7. 


THE  GARDEN  OP  JOSEPH   OP  ARIMATHEA. 


LESSON  LVL 


THE    BURIAL. 

A  rich  man  enters  a  palace.  He  speaks  to  a 
great  lord.  .  This  lord  is  dressed  like  a  Eoman  gen- 
eral— in  a  short  purple  cloak. 

The  rich  man  is  much  troubled  in  mind,  and  he 
makes  a  request  in  a  very  earnest  and  pressing 
manner. 

At  first  the  honorable  general  does  not  grant  the 


THE    BURIAL.  217 

request,  but  calls  a  captain,  and  asks  him  a  question. 
That  captain  also  is  a  Eoman.  He  answers  the  ques- 
tion of  his  general. 

Then  the  general  turns  toward  the  rich  Jew,  who 
is  standing  before  him,  and  grants  his  request. 

That  rich  man  has  a  friend,  rich  and  honorable 
like  himself.  They  go  both  together  toward  the 
gloomy  place  of  crucifixion.  One  brings  with  him 
an  immense  roll  of  fine  linen,  and  the  other  brings  a 
mixture  of  very  sweet  spices. 

Thus  laden,  they  approach  the  cross. 

The  soldiers  have  received  an  order  from  the 
great  general  to  give  the  wounded  body  to  these 
two  friends.  See  them  now  taking  out  those  nails 
which  they  thrust  in  a  few  hours  ago. 

The  two  rich  men  receive  the  body  in  their  loving 
arms.  They  lay  it  in  the  white  linen  sheet  as  care- 
fully as  Mary  once  wrapped  her  infant  in  its  first 
loose  robe.  They  cover  it  all  over  with  the  sweet, 
spicy  mixture,  and  then  place  the  arms  straight  by 
the  side,  and  fold  the  linen  round  and  round  the 
helpless  limbs.  But  they  give  the  head  a  separate 
covering;  the  bleeding  brows,  so  lately  pierced  .by 
thorns,  they  bind  with  a  linen  cloth. 

The  two  friends  bear  the  precious  burden  from 
the  loathsome  place  of  bones  toward  a  garden  close 


218  THE    BURIAL. 

by.     As  they  enter,  the  last  rays  of  the  setting  sun 
are  shining  through  the  green  boughs. 

Some  women  are  following  at  a  little  distance, 
and  watching  all  that  is  done  with  their  Lord's  body. 


BEARING   JESUS   TO   THE   TOMii. 


In  a  rock  a  cave  has  been  hewn.  No  dead  body 
was  ever  laid  there;  it  is  sweet  and  clean  as  the 
chamber  of  a  king.  The  friends  go  down  the  steps 
which  lead  into  that  cave,  and  place  the  body  on  the 
cold,  hard  floor.  There  they  leave  it,  under  the  care 
of  their  heavenly  Father  and  His  watchful  angels. 

Then  they  use  all  the  strength  they  have,  and  get 
all  the  help  they  can,  to  roll  an  enormous  stone  be- 
fore the  mouth  of  the  cave.     That  stone  guards  the 


THE    BURIAL.  219 

body  from  hungry  birds,  and  beasts,  and  malicious 
men. 

The  women  are  sitting  in  the  garden,  watching 
the  burial  of  their  Lord. 


WITHIN    THE   TOilli. 


How  sorrowfully  they  return  home  through  the 
dark  streets  of  Jerusalem ! 

What  rich  man  asked  for  the  body  of  Jesus? 

To  what  great  council  did  he  belong?  To  the  Jewish  Sanhe- 
drim, or  council  of  seventy,  the  council  who  condemned  Jesus 
to  die. 

Was  there  any  other  good  councilor  besides  Joseph? 

Whom  did  he  ask  to  give  him  the  body  of  Jesus?  Pontius 
Pilate. 

Whom  did  Pilate  inquire  of  before  he  granted  Joseph's  request? 
He  inquired  of  the  centurion,  or  captain  of  a  hundred. 


220  THE    GUARD. 

What  did  he  ask  him?     How  long  Jesus  had  been  dead. 

How  was  it  the  centurion  knew?  Because  he  had  been  with 
the  soldier  who  found  him  dead  and  who  pierced  his  side. 

In  whose  tomb  was  Jesus  buried? 

At  what  hour  was  he  buried?  Just  before  six  o'clock  on  Fri- 
day evening. 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  57-61.      Mark,  xv.,  42,  to  end.      Luke, 
xxiii.,  50-55.     John,  xix.,  38,  to  end. 

THE    SAVIOUR'S    TOMB. 

"  Now  in  the  place  where  he  was  crucified 
there  was  a  garden ;  and  in  the  garden  a  new 
sepulchre,  wherein  was  never  man  yet  laid." — 
John,  xix.,  41. 


LESSON  LYIL 

THE    GUARD. 

A  great  many  people  are  hastening  toward  the 
marble  building  on  the  top  of  the  hill.  There  is  no 
buying  nor  selling  in  the  streets,  no  carrying  of  bur- 
dens, no  grinding  of  flour  between  the  mill-stones, 
but  there  is  singing  of  psalms  and  repeating  of 
prayers   in   many  places.      Yet  the   people  do   not 


THE    GUARD.  221 

seem  happy  to-day ;  there  is  a  troubled  and  a  terri- 
fied look  upon  most  faces,  and  there  is  a  bad  and 
guilty  look  in  the  faces  of  the  chief  priests  and 
scribes. 

There  are  some  poor  women  whose  eyes  are  red 
with  weeping,  and  there  are  some  poor  men  who  can 
hardly  speak  for  sorrow. 

It  would  make  any  one's  heart  sad  to  walk 
through  the  streets  to-day,  and  to  see  such  miserable 
countenances. 

The  proud  priests  and  their  friends  are  consulting 
together.  They  have  something  upon  their  minds, 
and  they  are  at  a  loss  what  to  do.  Now  they  are 
going  together  toward  the  finest  palace  in  the  city* 
They  ask  for  the  governor.  They  are  telling  him 
what  troubles  them.  Ought  they  to  go  to  the  gov- 
ernor on  the  Sabbath?  Ought  they  not  to  be  wor- 
shiping God,  and  resting  from  worldly  business  ? 

The  governor  listens  to  their  complaints,  and  al- 
lows them  to  do  what  they  will. 

Now  they  are  on  their  way  to  the  temple.  Are 
they  going  to  worship  there  ?  No.  They  call  some 
soldiers  who  are  guarding  the  gates.  They  are  Eo- 
man  soldiers,  such  as  helped  the  Jews  to  seize  Jesus 
in  the  garden,  and  tormented  him  in  the  hall,  perhaps 
the  very  same  who  crucified  him.      They  wear  ar- 


222  THE    GUARD. 

mor,  and  short  woolen  cloaks  over  it,  and  they  hold 
long  spears  in  their  hands. 

The  soldiers  are  following  the  proud  priests  from 
the  temple  gate  to  the  garden  gate  near  Calvary. 
They  enter  the  garden.  They  sit  down  near  the 
cave,  close  by  the  great  stone. 

The  proud  men  begin  to  fasten  the  stone  to  the 
rock.  They  take  a  strip  of  leather,  and  put  a  plaster 
of  wet  clay  on  each  end,  and  then,  with  a  large  seal, 
they  stamp  the  clay.  No  one  can  go  into  the  cave 
without  breaking  the  seal,  and  so  it  would  be  known 
if  any  one  were  to  go  in.  Now  these  wicked  men 
are  sure  that  the  disciples  can  not  take  away  the 
body  from  the  cave. 

They  go  back  to  the  temple  to  offer  their  prayers 
and  their  sacrifices,  while  the  soldiers  watch  around 
the  tomb  all  the  day  and  all  the  night. 

Who  go  on  the  Sabbath  to  speak  to  Pilate?  The  men  who 
belong  to  the  council  of  the  Sanhedrim. 

What  soldiers  did  Pilate  allow  them  to  have?  The  Roman 
band  employed  in  guarding  the  temple  under  a  captain,  called  the 
captain  of  the  temple. 

Why  were  the  priests  afraid  lest  the  disciples  should  steal  the 
Lord's  body  ?  They  thought  the  disciples  would  say  that  Jesus 
had  risen,  and  so  every  body  would  believe  in  Jesus. 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  62,  to  end. 


THE    RESURRECTION.  223 

THE   HOPE    OF    CHRIST^    ENEMIES. 

"Now  that  he  lieth  he   shall  rise  up  no 
more." — Ps.  xli.,  8. 


LESSON  LVIII. 

THE    RESURRECTION. 

Around  a  great  rock  in  a  gloomy  garden  some 
soldiers  are  sitting,  armed  with  long  spears.  It  is 
still  dark.  Those  soldiers  have  been  watching  all 
night,  and  they  are  longing  for  the  rising  of  the  sun. 
Suddenly  they  feel  the  earth  tremble;  they  shake 
from  head  to  foot ;  the  earth  heaves,  and  cracks,  and 
opens ;  and  at  the  same  moment  a  bright  angel  from 
heaven  appears  in  the  midst  of  them,  and  rolls  back 
with  his  strong  arm  the  enormous  stone ;  then  seats 
himself  upon  it,  as  a  king  upon  his  throne. 

The  soldiers  are  so  much  overcome  with  terror  at 
this  sight  that  they  can  not  run  away,  but  fall  down 
like  dead  men  upon  the  earth.  They  hear  no  more 
the  rumbling  of  the  ground ;  they  feel  no  more  the 
mighty  heaving,  nor  do  they  see  who  comes  out  of 
that  cave. 


224  THE    RESURRECTION. 

After  lying  senseless  for  a  little  while,  they  rise 
up,  and,  without  daring  to  look  into  the  cave,  they 
rush  back  into  the  city. 

Soon  after  they  are  gone  three  women  enter  the 
garden,  carrying  in  their  arms  large  jars.  They  are 
the  very  same  women  who  sat  in  that  garden  two 
days  before.  The  sun  was  setting  then,  but  now  it 
is  rising. 

The  first  thing  these  women  see  when  they  enter 
the  garden  is  the  enormous  stone  lying  at  a  little 
distance  from  the  cave ;  but  there  is  no  angel  sitting 
there  now. 

The  women  are  filled  with  terror.  One  is  more 
alarmed  than  her  companions,  and  she  ventures  not 
a  step  farther,  but  runs  out  of  the  garden,  and  goes 
quickly  to  the  disciples'  house. 

The  other  two  women,  though  much  frightened, 
go  toward  the  open  cave,  and  venture  to  walk  in, 
hoping  to  find  the  body  of  their  Lord.  But  how 
much  are  they  astonished  to  see  a  young  man,  dress- 
ed in  a  long  white  garment,  sitting  in  the  cave! 
Now  they  are  more  alarmed  than  ever. 

But  hark !  the  young  man  speaks.  How  kind  are 
his  words !     Yet  the  women  tremble  still. 

They  hasten  to  leave  the  tomb,  and  they  run  very- 
fast  along  the  streets,  not  speaking  to  any  one  they 


THE    RESURRECTION.  225 

meet;  but,  though  they  tremble  as  they  run,  they 
are  full  of  joy.  As  soon  as  they  reach  the  disciples' 
house  they  tell  them  all  that  has  happened. 

The  other  woman  (who  ran  first  into  the  city)  has 
already  told  two  of  the  disciples,  and  these  two  are 
running  in  great  haste  toward  the  garden. 

One  of  them  runs  faster  than  the  other,  but, 
though  he  arrives  first  at  the  tomb,  he  does  not  go 
in,  but  only  stoops  down  and  looks  in.  And  what 
does  he  see?  Not  angels,  but  only  linen  clothes 
neatly  folded  up. 

His  friend  soon  reaches  the  spot;  he  does  more 
than  look  in;  he  goes  into  the  cave,  and  finds  there 
the  linen  clothes.  He  is  surprised  to  see  the  linen 
which  was  wrapped  around  his  Lord's  head  lying, 
neatly  folded  up,  in  a  place  by  itself. 

The  man  who  ran  fastest  now  comes  in  too.  He 
also  looks  at  the  linen  clothes,  and  he  feels  sure  that 
robbers  have  not  been  there,  for  they  would  have 
taken  those  precious  clothes  and  precious  spices,  and 
not  have  left  them  in  such  order ;  therefore  he  feels 
sure  that  his  Lord  is  alive,  and  has  risen  from  his 
tomb.  This  very  man  saw  the  spear  thrust  into  his 
side,  so  he  is  sure  his  Lord  has  died,  and  yet  he  is 
sure  that  he  is  alive.  These  two  friends  return  to 
their  own  home.     Oh,  what  a  happy  walk  thev  have 

P 


226  THE    RESURRECTION. 

as  they  talk  together  of  their  living  Lord!  And 
oh!  what  happy  news  they  have  to  bring  to  their 
Lord's  dear  mother ! 

Is  there  any  one  in  the  garden  now  the  disciples 
are  gone  home  ?  Oh  yes ;  there  is  a  woman  stand- 
ing near  the  cave,  and  weeping  abundantly.  She  is 
the  woman  who  ran  out  of  the  garden  as  soon  as 
ever  she  saw  that  the  stone  had  been  rolled  away. 
She  has  returned,  but  she  has  not  entered  the 
cave. 

Now  she  stoops  down  and  looks  into  the  tomb, 
and  she  sees,  not  linen  clothes  only,  but  angels. 
They  are  clothed  in  white,  and  one  is  sitting  where 
the  head  of  Jesus  once  lay,  and  the  other  where  his 
feet  lay.     They  speak  kindly  to  the  weeping  woman. 

She  answers  them  in  a  tone  of  deep  grief,  as  if 
she  could  not  be  comforted. 

Does  she  know  these  are  angels?  Surely,  if  she 
did,  she  would  not  go  on  weeping  as  she  does. 

She  turns  round,  and  sees  a  man  standing  near 
her,  but  she  does  not  know  who  he  is.  He  speaks 
to  her,  and  she  answers  in  the  same  sorrowful  voice 
as  before.  He  speaks  one  word,  and  that  one  word 
takes  away  all  her  grief.  She  turns  toward  him 
with  great  joy,  and  she  utters  one  word. 

She  would  hold  him  fast,  but  he  will  not  let  her. 


THE    RESUKEECTION.  227 

He  speaks  some  sweet,  heavenly  words,  and  then 
she  leaves  the  garden,  and  runs  with  haste  to  tell 
the  disciples  whom  she  has  seen. 

She  was  the  first  to  see  her  Lord ;  but  very  soon 
the  other  women  saw  him  too,  for  they  met  him  on 
the  way,  and  they  held  him  by  the  feet  and  wor- 
shiped him. 

What  three  women  came  first  to  the  tomb  ?  Salome  (the  moth- 
er of  James  and  John),  Mary  (the  mother  of  James  and  Jude), 
and  Mary  Magdalene. 

Who  ran  away  as  soon  as  she  saw  the  stone  ?  Mary  Mag- 
dalene. 

What  two  disciples  did  she  tell?     Peter  and  John. 

Which  of  them  reached  the  tomb  first? 

Which  went  into  the  tomb  first? 

What  did  the  angels  say  to  the  women  who  entered  the  tomb? 

Who  wept  alone  near  the  cave? 

What  did  the  angels  say  to  her? 

What  did  the  Lord  first  say  to  her? 

Were  these  the  first  words  he  spoke  to  any  man  or  woman 
after  rising  from  his  tomb?     Yes. 

What  did  Jesus  say  to  the  women  whom  he  met?  "  All  hail !" 
which  means,  "Be  glad." 

Did  any  other  women  go  to  the  tomb  besides  the  three  who 
went  first  ?  Yes,  Susanna,  Joanna,  and  several  more ;  and  they 
saw  angels,  but  not  Jesus.     Their  visit  is  related  by  St.  Luke. 

Was  Jesus  seen  by  any  of  the  apostles  on  the  day  of  his  res- 
urrection? Yes,  by  Peter;  but  we  do  not  know  when  or  where. 
Thus  Jesus  showed  Peter  that  his  sin  in  the  hall  was  par- 
doned. 

Matt.,  xxviii.,  1-10.       Mark,  xvi.,  1-9.       John, 
xx..  1-18. 


228  the  resurrection. 

the  first  words  of  the  risen  jesus,  and 
mary's  answers. 

"Woman,  why  weepest  thou?" 
"  Because  they  have  taken  away  my  Lord, 
and  I  know  not  where  they  have  laid  him." 

"Mary!" 
"RabboniT 


THE   MEETING   NEAR  EMMAUS. 


LESSON  LIX. 


THE    EVENING    WALK. 


Two  men  go  out  of  the  gates  of  Jerusalem  to 
walk  to  their  home  in  the  country.  The  heat  of 
the  day  is  over,  and  the  air  has  all  the  freshness  and 
sweetness  of  the  spring.  The  path  lies  among  rocky 
mountains,  where  few  travelers  are  seen. 

The  two  friends  are  talking  to  each  other  in  sor- 
rowful tones.  Neither  is  able  to  comfort  the  other, 
m  - , 

for  both  seem  crushed  under  a  heavy  burden  of  grief 


230  THE    EVENING    WALK. 

A  stranger  comes  up  to  them,  and  speaks  to  them 
in  a  kind,  compassionate  voice.  The  two  friends  do 
not  remember  having  ever  seen  him  before,  but  they 
readily  answer  his  gracious  inquiries ;  and  soon  they 
open  their  hearts,  and  tell  him  all  their  troubles. 

He  listens,  and  then  answers  them  in  a  warm  and 
earnest  manner.  He  teaches  them  as  he  walks  with 
them,  and  explains  to  them  many  things  they  do  not 
understand. 

About  seven  miles  from  Jerusalem  there  is  a  little 
village,  watered  by  refreshing  streams  flowing  down 
the  sides  of  the  mountains. 

At  the  door  of  a  humble  dwelling  in  this  village 
the  two  friends  stop.  They  are  just  entering;  the 
stranger  seems  to  be  going  farther ;  but  they  entreat 
him  to  come  in,  and  he  comes  in. 

The  supper  is  spread  upon  the  table,  and  the 
three  are  seated  round  it. 

Before  they  begin  to  eat  the  stranger  takes  the 
bread,  blesses  it,  and  breaks  it,  and  gives  it  to  the 
two  friends. 

They  look  at  him,  and  are  astonished ;  but  before 
they  can  speak  to  him  he  is  gone  ! 

They  turn  to  each  other  and  express  their  delight ; 
then  leave  the  table,  and  set  out  that  very  evening 
to   go   to  Jerusalem.      How  quickly  they   go   over 


THE    EVENING    WALK.  231 

those  hilly  paths!  more  quickly  far  than  when  the 
stranger  was  cheering  them  with  his  sweet  words. 

They  hasten  to  the  disciples'  dwelling.  The  doors 
are  locked,  but  those  within  open  when  they  hear 
well-known  voices  outside. 

Ten  apostles  are  in  the  room,  and  many  of  their 
friends,  and  they  are  all  talking  earnestly  together. 

While  they  are  all  telling  each  other  the  happy 
news,  they  look  up,  and  see  in  the  midst  the  Beloved 
One  standing!  Though  the  doors  are  locked,  he 
comes  in,  for  he  can  open  any  lock. 

At  first  all  the  disciples  are  terrified;  but  they 
soon  hear  a  gentle  voice  encouraging  them.  The 
Lord  shows  them  his  hands  and  his  feet,  with  the 
marks  of  the  nails,  and  the  deep  hole  in  his  side ; 
and  he  lets  them  touch  his  body,  that  they  may  see 
it  is  made  of  real  flesh  and  bones.  And  so  the  dis- 
ciples are  frightened  no  more,  but  only  very  glad, 
and  very  much  surprised. 

Now  they  bring  him  food — a  little  broiled  fish 
and  a  piece  of  honeycomb.  They  see  him  eat  as  he 
used  to  do.    Now  they  feel  sure  that  he  is  a  real  Man. 

But  He  is  God  too;  for  he  breathes  on  his  apos- 
tles, and  gives  them  the  Holy  Ghost. 

Many  eyes,  that  were  yesterday  running  down 
with  tears,  are  beaming  with  joy  this  happy  evening. 


232  THE    EVENING    WALK. 

Who  are  those  two  friends  walking  into  the  country?  One  is 
named  Cleopas ;  the  name  of  the  other  is  not  known.  It  is 
probable  his  name  is  Luke,  for  Luke  relates  the  story.  Holy  men 
are  humble,  and  avoid  mentioning  their  own  names  except  when 
it  is  necessary. 

Where  are  they  going?  To  Emmaus,  a  village  seven  miles 
from  Jerusalem,  on  the  north.     Emmaus  signifies  "  Hot  Baths." 

On  what  day  are  they  walking  ?  On  Sunday,  the  day  when 
Christ  arose. 

What  are  they  talking  about  ? 

Have  they  not  heard  of  Christ  having  risen?  Yes,  they  have 
heard  that  the  second  company  of  women  saw  angels  who  said 
Jesus  was  alive,  but  they  have  not  heard  of  the  first  company  of 
women  having  seen  Jesus  himself? 

What  does  Jesus  explain  to  the  two  friends?  The  prophecies 
about  himself,  such  as  those  in  Ps.  xxii.  and  Isa.,  liii. 

How  do  the  two  friends  find  out  who  the  stranger  is  ?  By 
God's  opening  their  eyes  to  know  him. 

What  are  the  first  words  that  Jesus  speaks  when  he  enters  the 
room? 

Luke,  xxiv.,  13-44.      Mark,  xvi.,  12,  13.      John, 
xx.,  19-24. 

THE    FIRST    WORDS    OF    JESUS    TO    HIS    APOSTLES 
AFTER    HE    HAD    RISEN. 

"  Peace  be  unto  you.  Why  are  ye  troub- 
led? and  why  do  thoughts  arise  in  your 
hearts?  Behold  my  hands  and  my  feet,  that 
it  is  I  MYSELF." 


THE     UNBELIEVING    APOSTLE.  233 


LESSON  LX. 

THE   UNBELIEVING    APOSTLE. 

Ten  men  are  talking  to  a  friend.  They  seem  to 
be  telling  him  some  joyful  news ;  but  he  is  hard  and 
obstinate,  and  will  not  believe  what  they  say. 

All  these  men  are  sitting  together  at  supper  one 
evening.  They  have  locked  the  doors,  to  prevent 
their  enemies  coming  in  to  hurt  them. 

Suddenly  they  see  their  most  beloved  Friend 
standing  in  the  midst. 

He  utters  some  sweet  words.:  Only  one  of  the 
company  is  frightened ;  the  rest  know  well  who  he  is. 

He  calls  that  frightened  man  to  come  to  him. 

Then  he  shows  him  his  hands,  with  the  marks 
of  the  nails,  and  also  a  deep  wound  in  his  side. 

The  man  looks  astonished  and  ashamed.     He  is " 
no  longer  hard   and   obstinate.      He   is  very  sorry 
for  his  unbelief,  and  very,  very  glad  to  see  his  Lord. 

His  Master  speaks  a  few  gentle  words  of  reproof. 

Which  of  the  apostles  was  absent  on  the  Sunday  when  Jesus 
first  appeared? 

What  did  he  say  when  the  other  apostles  told  him  they  had 
seen  Jesns? 


234  THE    BREAKFAST. 

When  did  this  apostle  see  his  risen  Lord?     The  next  Sunday 
evening  after  the  Resurrection  Sunday. 

What  did  he  cry  out  w^ien  he  saw  the  wounds? 

Mark,  xvi.,  14.     John,  xx.,  24-30. 
THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    TO    THOMAS. 

"  Thomas,  because  thou  hast  seen  me,  thou 
hast  believed ;  blessed  are  they  that  have  not 
seen,  and  yet  have  believed. " — John,  xx.,  29. 


LESSON  LXI. 

THE     BREAKFAST. 


The  sun  is  rising  upon  that  lake.  A  boat  is 
floating  on  the  waters.  Seven  poor  men  are  in  the 
boat.  They  look  hungry  and  weary,  as  if  they  had 
passed  a  sleepless  night  and  had  eaten  nothing. 
There  are  no  fishes  in  the  boat's  hold,  and  no  food 
of  any  kind  on  board. 

The  seven  fishermen  see  a  man  standing  on  the 
shore,  but  they  don't  know  who  he  is.  He  calls 
out  to  them.  They  answer.  He  speaks  again,  and 
they  let  down  their  net  into  the  sea.  Now  they  are 
trying  with  all  their  might  to  pull  it  up  again,  but 


THE    BREAKFAST.  235 

they  can  not.  They  are  astonished.  One  of  the 
men  speaks  a  word  to  his  friend,  and  immediately 
that  friend  wraps  his  loose  upper  garment  around 
him,  and  wades  through  the  water  to  the  shore. 

The  other  six  get  to  land  in  the  boat,  dragging 
after  them  the  net  full  of  fishes. 

As  soon  as  they  reach  the  shore  they  see  a  fire 
burning  there,  with  some  fish  broiling  on  the  hot 
embers,  and  some  bread.  Who  can  have  kindled 
that  fire,  and  prepared  that  breakfast? 

The  man  who  stood  and  called  is  there.  The 
man  also  who  waded  through  the  sea  is  there. 
That  man  had  not  helped  to  drag  the  net  through 
the  sea,  but  now  he  goes  and  pulls  it  to  shore,  and 
he  finds  it  full  of  large  fishes,  in  all  one  hundred 
and  fifty -three!  He  is  surprised  to  see  that  this 
great  load  has  not  broken  his  net,  as  once  before 
another  load  did  break  his  net. 

None  of  these  fishes  are  wanted  for  the  fishermen's 
dinner;  that  is  ready  upon  the  fire.  He  who  pre- 
pared it  invites  the  seven  fishermen  to  sit  down,  and 
then  with  his  own  hands  he  gives  them  each  a  por- 
tion of  bread  and  fish.  Those  hands  bear  still  the 
marks  of  nails,  and  they  feed  the  men  for  whom 
they  bled. 

After   the   seven  have  finished   their  meal,  their 


23&  THE     BREAKFAST 

gracious  Master  talks  to  them.  He  speaks  especially 
to  the  man  who  waded  through  the  water.  He  asks 
him  the  same  question  three  times  over;  he  grieves 
him  by  repeating  it  so  often,  but  he  does  it  in  love. 

Then  he  calls  him  away  from  the  rest,  that  he 
may  talk  to  him  alone;  but  another  of  the  seven 
comes  too,  even  that  apostle  who  first  knew  who  it 
was  standing  by  the  lake. 

Those  two  apostles  seem  to  be  great  friends,  and 
to  be  also  the  favorites  of  their  Lord. 

What  lake  is  that  where  the  men  are  fishing?  The  Lake  of 
Gehnesareth  ;  also  called  the  Sea  of  Tiberias,  and  Sea  of  Galilee, 

What  are  the  names  of  the  seven  disciples  ? 

What  is  Nathaniel's  other  name?     Bartholomew. 

Which  knew  first  the  Lord's  voice? 

Which  went  into  the  sea? 

What  grieved  him  after  the  breakfast? 

What  did  Jesus  say  would  happen  to  that  apostle  at  last?  He 
would  be  crucified. 

John,  xxi.,  1-25. 
THE    WORDS    OF    JESUS    AND    PETER. 

a  Simon,  son  of  Jonas,  lovest  thou  me 
more  than  these?" 

"  Yea,  Lord,  thou  knowest  that  I  love  thee." 
uFeed  my  lambs. " 


'HE    WAS    SEEV   OF    AT'OYE   FIVE    HUNDRED   BRETHREN    AT   ONCE." 


LESSON  LXIL 

THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY. 

What  a  number  of  people  are  climbing  up  that 
mountain!  Some  are  walking  two  and  three  to- 
gether, and  some  are  coming  one  by  one,  and  some 
are  coming  in  troops  of  ten,  or  twelve,  or  twenty. 
They  have  made  long  journeys,  and  they  look  weary, 
but  very  joyful.  They  mount  with  eager  steps  the 
steep  sides  of  the  mountain. 

When    they  have    all   reached   the   summit   they 


238  THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY. 

wait  there  with,  anxious  hearts.  They  do  not  care 
for  the  prospect  they  see  from  the  hill-top;  their 
thoughts  are  fixed  upon  some  absent  Friend. 

He  comes  !  what  delight ! 

They  fall  at  his  feet  and  worship  Him. 

But  some  look  at  him  with  fear,  as  if  they  saw 
a  stranger. 

He  shows  them  his  wounded  side,  and  they  be- 
lieve ;  and  they  also  worship  at  his  feet. 

Then  he  talks  to  them.  What  heavenly  words 
he  utters!  How  gracious  his  countenance!  How 
sweet  his  voice ! 

What  is  the  name  of  that  mountain?  No  one  knows;  but  it 
is  a  mountain  in  Galilee.  It  may  be  the  very  same  where  once 
he  shone  like  the  sun  before  the  three  apostles. 

Why  did  the  people  come  to  the  mountain  ?  Because  Jesus 
had  invited  them,  as  the  angel  said  at  the  tomb,  "He  goeth  be- 
fore you  into  Galilee;    there  shall  ye  see  him."     Mark,  xvi.,  7. 

How  many  people  saw  Jesus  on  the  mountain?  More  than 
five  hundred. 

Matt.,  xxviii.,  16,  17  ;  part  of  18. 

THE  WORDS  OF  PAUL  ABOUT  JESUS  ON  THE 
MOUNTAIN. 

"He  was  seen  of  above  five  hundred  breth- 
ren at  once  ;  of  whom  the  greater  part  remain 
unto  this  present,  but  some  are  fallen  asleep. w 
- — 1  Cor.,  xv.,  6. 


THE    ASCENSION.  239 


LESSON  LXIII. 

THE    ASCENSION. 

How  happy  are  those  eleven  men  sitting  around 
their  glorious  Friend  in  the  beautiful  city!  How 
attentively  they  listen  to  every  word  he  speaks! 
Once  they  could  not  understand  all  he  said,  but  now 
they  can.  Once  they  did  not"  believe  all  he  said, 
but  now  they  do. 

After  conversing  for  a  long  while,  the  little  com- 
pany walk  together  through  the  streets  of  Jerusalem. 
They  go  the  way  they  used  to  go  so  often ;  not  the 
painful  way  to  Calvary,  but  the  peaceful  way  to 
Olivet 

As  they  go,  they  talk.  The  eleven  ask  a  ques- 
tion of  their  Friend,  and  He  makes  a  promise  to 
them. 

They  go  up  the  mountain,  and  there  the  Saviour 
lifts  up  his  hands  and  blesses  his  beloved  friends. 

While  he  is  blessing  them,  lo!  he  rises  in  the 
air,  borne  aloft  by  a  cloud.  He  ascends  higher  and 
higher,  and  at  last  He  is  out  of  the  sight  of  men. 


240  THE    ASCENSION. 

His  disciples  lift  up  their  faces  toward  heaven, 
and  keep  looking  at  their  ascending  Lord  with  eager 
eyes,  till  the  last  speck  in  the  sky  has  disappeared. 

They  hear  sweet  voices  close  beside  them.  They 
look,  and  they  see  two  angels,  dressed  in  white. 
These  angels  speak  comfortable  words  to  them. 

The  eleven  disciples  fall  down  and  worship  their 
ascended  Lord  upon  that  mountain  top. 

Then  they  descend  the  hill,  and  return  to  the  city, 
not  weeping, as  they  go,  but  rejoicing  and  praising 
God.. 

They,  enter  the  temple  and  worship  there. 

How  long  did  Jesus  stay  upon  earth  after  his  resurrection  ? 
Forty  days. 

Where  did  Jesus  live  all  that  time  ?  No  one  knows ;  but  he 
often  appeared  to"  his  disciples. 

We  read  of  five  times  that  he  appeared : 

1.  At  Jerusalem,  on  the  Sunday  that  he  rose. 

2.  At  Jerusalem,  on  the  next  Sunday,  when  he  spoke  to 
Thomas. 

3.  By  the  Lake  of  Gennesareth. 

4.  On  a  mountain  in  Galilee. 

5.  At  Jerusalem  and  Bethany,  just  before  he  ascended. 
What  were  the  last  commands  he  gave  to  his  apostles?      To 

preach  the  Gospel  and  to  baptize  those  who  believed. 
What  question  did  the  apostles  ask? 
How  will  he  come  again?     With  clouds  on  Mount  Olivet. 

Matt.,  xxviii.,  18-20.      Mark,  xvi.,  15,  to  end.      Luke, 
xxiv.,  50,  to  end.     Acts,  i.,  6-13.     Zech.,  xiv.,  4. 


THE    ASCENSION.  241 

THE    ANGELS'    WORDS    TO    THE    APOSTLES. 

"  Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why  stand  ye  gazing 
up  into  heaven?  This  same  Jesus,  which  is 
taken  up  from  you  into  heaven,  shall  so  come 
in  like  manner  as  ye  have  seen  him  go  into 
heaven." 

Q 


242  THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY 


THE  MOUNTAIN  ASSEMBLY. 

They're  hast'ning,  hast'ning,  hast'ning  there, 

From  village  and  from  town; 
He's  coming,  coming,  coming  there, 

Who  wore  the  thorny  crown. 

Oh,  how  I  wonder  who  were  there, 

Ajid  what  they  did  and  said ! 
How  glad  they  were  to  see  Him  there, 

So  lately  monrn'd  as  dead ! 

I  know  beloved  John  was  there, 

Who  leaned  on  Jesus'  breast ; 
I  know  his  brother  James  was  there. 

Who  died  before  the  rest.  Acts,  xii.,2. 

The  other  James  and  Jude  were  there. 

Who  wrote  epistles  since; 
And  Thomas  Didymus  was  there, 

The  hardest  to  convince. 

And  Simon,  Jonah's  son,  was  there, 

Who  wept  outside  the  hall; 
His  brother  Andrew,  too,  was  there. 

Who  call'd  him  first  of  all.  John,  i.,  41. 

Obedient  Philip — he  was  there, 

Whose  Lord  said,  " Follow  me!''  John,  i.,  43. 

Nathaniel,  Philip's  friend,  was  there. 

Who  prayed  beneath  the  tree.  John,  i ,  4S 


THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY.  2i3 

The  generous  publican  was  there, 

Who  made  his  friends  a  feast; 
The  man  of  Cana,  too,  was  there, 

Of  whom  we  know  the  least. 

The  traitor  Judas  was  not  there — 

A  devil  from  the  first;  John,  vi.,  70. 

Eleven  were  bless'd  with  Jesus  there, 

The  twelfth  with  Satan — cursed.  Matt,  xxvi,  24. 

How  many  were  with  Jesus  there, 

Whose  names  we  do  not  know? 
For  aU  who  loved  the  Lord  were  there, 

An<^  could  the  journey  go. 

The  paralytic — was  he  there, 

Once  cheer' d  by  pardoning  words  ?  Matt.,  ix.,  % 

And  were  his  faithful  bearers  there, 

Who  let  him  down  by  cords? 

The  wretched  dumb  boy — was  he  there, 

By  Satan  torn  for  years?  Matt,  ix.,  IT. 

And  was  his  sorrowing  father  there, 

Who  prayed  for  faith  with  tears? 

Samaria's  daughter — was  she  there, 

Who  call'd  her  countrymen? 
And  was  Samaria's  leper  there, 

Most  grateful  of  the  ten? 

The  good  centurion — was  he  there, 

The  saint  of  heathen  birth? 
And  was  the  Tyrian  mother  there, 

With  faith  of  priceless  worth?  Mark  vii,  24 


244  THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY. 

The  rich  Zacchseus — was  he  there, 

Who  frankly  own'd  his  sin? 
And  was  the  lowly  widow  there, 

Who  put  her  farthing  in? 

Blind  Bartimseus — was  he  there, 

Who  called  so  long  and  loud? 
And  was  the  other  blind  man  there, 

Once  cast  out  by  the  proud?  John,  ix.,  24. 

The  weeping  sinner — was  she  there, 

Who  wash'd  the  Saviour's  feet?  Luke,  vii.,  3S. 

And  was  the  grateful  Mary  there, 

Whose  ointment  was  so  sweet?  John,  xii.,  3. 

Her  sister  Martha — was  she  there, 

Who  willing  service  gave  ?  John,  xii,  2. 

And  was  her  brother  Lazarus  there, 

Who  left  the  darksome  cave? 

The  man  of  Olives — was  he  there, 

Who  lent  a  colt  to  ride?  Matt.,  xxi.,  3. 

And  was  the  man  of  Salem  there. 

Who  did  a  room  provide?  Luke,  xx.,  12. 

The  couns'lor  Joseph — was  he  there, 

Who  did  the  body  crave  ?  John,  xix.,  38. 

And  was  wise  Nicodemus  there,  u     xix.,  39. 

Who  costly  spices  gave? 

The  little  children — were  they  there, 

Once  clasp'd  in  Jesus'  arms? 
And  were  the  singing  children  there, 

Foretold  in  David's  Psalms?  Matt,  xxi.,  16. 


THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY. 


245 


Joanna — Susan — were  they  there, 

Who  came  from  Galilee  ?  Luke,  viii,  3. 

Was  Mary  Magdalene  there, 

The  first  her  Lord  to  see?  Mark,  xvi.,  9. 

The  other  Mary — was  she  there, 

Mother  of  Jude  and  James?     Matt.,xxvL,56;  xxviii.,1. 
And  was  devout  Salome  there, 

Mother  of  John  and  James?  *{"*'  ^h^- 

Matt.,  xxvu.,  oo. 

The  blessed  Mother — was  she  there, 

Who  watch'd  the  manger-bed? — 
What  joy  to  see,  victorious  there, 

The  Babe  she  nursed  and  fed ! 

They  sleep — they  sleep,  who  saw  Him  there, 

And  He's  beyond  the  skies; 
Their  spirits  live  with  Jesus  there, 

Until  their  bodies  rise. 

O  God,  a  sinful  child  prepare, 

To  see  the  Saviour  where 
The  saints,  arrayed  in  garments  fair, 

Shall  meet  Him  in  the  air !  i  Thess.,  iv.,  17. 


P 


Joyful. 


f 


EE 


^ 


-J — afc 


They're  hast'n  -  ing,  hast'n  -  ing,    hast'n  -  ing  there,  From 


S 


^ 


5±ti  rr~=g  i  r  •  g  r 


246 


THE    MOUNTAIN    ASSEMBLY. 


I 


50E 


m 


^e 


mm 


~=mm 


vil  -  lage  and  from  town ; 


/ 

He's  com  -  ing,  com  -  ing, 


m?Tf  g  r-^B    >•  i  ft=jir-  e  r^ 


com  -  ing  there,  Who  wore     the   thorn  -  y    crown. 


^& 


•»  r  •  g  r  •  j^^ 


THE    END. 


14  May  1859      I 


Deacidified  using  the  Bookkeeper  process. 
Neutralizing  agent:  Magnesium  Oxide 
Treatment  Date:  July  2005 

PreservationTechnologies 

A  WORLD  LEADER  IN  PAPER  PRESERVATION 

1 1 1  Thomson  Park  Drive 
Cranberry  Township,  PA  16066 
(724)  779-21 1 1